Redundant I/O System

Catalog Numbers 1715-AENTR, 1715-IB16D, 1715-IF16,

1715-OB8DE, 1715-OF8I

User Manual Original Instructions

Redundant I/O System User Manual

Important User Information

Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and
operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to familiarize
themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws, and standards.

Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required to
be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.

If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.

In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use
or application of this equipment.

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for
actual use based on the examples and diagrams.

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software
described in this manual.

Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc., is
prohibited.

Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.

WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment,
which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.

These labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.

SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.

BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may
reach dangerous temperatures.

ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to
potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).

The following icon may appear in the text of this document.

Identifies information that is useful and can help to make a process easier to do or easier to understand.

2 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Table of Contents

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
About This Publication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Download Firmware, AOP, EDS, and Other Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Summary of Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Chapter 1
Redundancy System Required Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Redundant 1715 Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1715 I/O Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1715 I/O Modules in SIL 2 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
System Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Termination Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Base Unit Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1715-AENTR Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
I/O Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Module Positioning in the 1715 Redundant I/O System . . . . . . . . . . 14
Lay Out the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
System Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Simplex Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Duplex Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Mixed Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Bus Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Switchover Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Obtaining a New IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Ethernet Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Communication on the EtherNet/IP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
System Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
RPI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Connection and Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Timestamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Chapter 2
Installation Instructions Environment and Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Prevent Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
European and United Kingdom Hazardous Location Approval . . . 30
Multi-point Network Communication Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Field-side Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
North American Hazardous Location Approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Make Sure that Warranty is Not Compromised . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Graphical Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 3
Table of Contents

Spacing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
System Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1715-AENTR Adapter Redundant Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1715 Digital and Analog I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1715-A2A Adapter Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
1715-A3IO I/O Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
I/O Termination Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
1715-C2 Expansion Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
1715-N2T and 1715-N2S Slot Filler Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Power Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Cooling Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Heating Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Specify an Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Module Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Base Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Install Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Step 1: Enclosure DIN Rail Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Step 2: Build the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Product Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
DIN Rail Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
DIN Rail Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Component Size and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Install the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Install the Adapter Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Install the I/O Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Install Termination Assembly to I/O Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Mount Termination Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Mount I/O Expansion Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Cable Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Expansion Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Install Expansion Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Wire the Adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Connect the 24V DC System Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Wire the Ground Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Connect Field Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Recommended Circuits for Digital Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Recommended Circuits for Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
1715-OB8DE Digital Output Module FBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Recommended Circuits for Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Recommended Wiring for Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Connect the Adapter to the Ethernet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Module Keying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Verify Coding Pegs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Electronic Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Install the Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Assign an IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Step 1: Assign an IP Address on the BOOTP/DHCP Server . . . . . . 104
Step 2: Configure the Module with RSLinx Classic Software . . . . 106
4 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022
 Table of Contents

Install the I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Install Slot Filler Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Remove Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Chapter 3
Security Protected Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Web Server Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Chapter 4
Digital I/O Operation 1715 Digital Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
1715-IB16D Digital Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
1715-OB8DE Digital Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Common Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Input Module Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Termination Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Output Module Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Termination Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Features Common to 1715 Standard Digital I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Module Fault Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Fully Software Configurable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Module Inhibiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Status Indicator Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Features Specific to 1715-IB16D Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Data Transfer on Either Cyclic Time or Change of State . . . . . . . . 120
Set RPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Enable Change of State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Field-side Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Features Specific to 1715-OB8DE Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . 123
Field Power Status Integers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Field Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Configurable Point-level Output Fault States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Output Data Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Diagnostic Latch Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Shutdown State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Energize-on-communication-failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
De-energize-to-trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Disable Line Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules and Controllers . . . 130
Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and Controllers. . 131

Chapter 5
Analog I/O Operation 1715 Analog Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
1715-IF16 Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
1715-OF8I Analog Output Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Features Common to All Analog I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 5

Table of Contents

Module Fault Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Fully Software Configurable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Status Indicator Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Module Inhibiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Online Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Offline Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Shutdown Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Ready Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Run Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Shutdown States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
HART Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Configuration of HART Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Precautions for HART in a Safety System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Configure HART for Field Device Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
AB:1715_ChCHART_Struc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
HART Pass-Through. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Using HART Pass-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
HART Pass-Through Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Precautions for HART Pass-Through in a Safety System . . . . . . . . 145
Installing the 1715-DTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Updating the Asset Management System DTM Catalogue . . . . . . 148
Enable HART Pass-Through in the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Using FactoryTalk AssetCentre with Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . 149
1715-DTM Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
1715-DTM HART Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Chapter 6
Redundant I/O Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
System Configuration Install the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Install the AOPs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Product Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
EDS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Create the Project in RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 Logix Designer. . 158
Step 1: Create the New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Step 2: Configure the Controller in the Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Step 3: Add a 1756-EN2TR Module to the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Add the 1715-AENTR Adapter to the I/O Configuration Tree . . . . . . . . 162
Step 1: Configure the Adapter for the EtherNet/IP Network . . . . . 162
Options for Setting the IP Addresses of 1715-AENTR Modules . . . 163
EtherNet/IP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Step 2: Add the 1715-AENTR Adapter to the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Obtaining System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
1715-IB16D Digital Input Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Add the Digital Input Module to the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Step 1: Add the Digital Input Module in Duplex Mode . . . . . . . . . . 174
Step 2: Add the Digital Input Module in Simplex Mode . . . . . . . . . 179

6 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Table of Contents

1715-OB8DE Digital Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Step 1: Add the Digital Output Module in Duplex Mode. . . . . . . . . 181
Step 2: Add the Digital Output Module in Simplex Mode . . . . . . . 184
1715-IF16 Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Add the Analog Input Module to the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Step 1: Add the Analog Input Module in Duplex Mode . . . . . . . . . . 185
Step 2: Add the Analog Input Module in Simplex Mode . . . . . . . . . 188
1715-OF8I Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Add the Analog Output Module to the project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Step 1: Add the Analog Output Module in Duplex Mode. . . . . . . . . 190
Step 2: Add the Analog Output Module in Simplex Mode . . . . . . . 194

Chapter 7
Redundant I/O Diagnostic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
System Diagnostics
Appendix A
Status Indicators Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Module Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Channel Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Field Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
User Application Fault Indications and Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Troubleshooting Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
1715 Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
1715 Digital Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
1715 Digital Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
1715 Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
1715 Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Appendix B
1715-IB16D Digital Input Threshold Values for Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Module Diagnostics Threshold Diagnostics Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Calculate Threshold and Resistor Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Calculate the Voltage for Off/On Conditions for Threshold Values. . 215
Calculate On/Off Condition for Resistor Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Calibration Drift Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Appendix C
Reconfigure a Module Online Use Ladder Logic to Reconfigure an I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Reconfigure a Module via Studio 5000 Logix Designer Application . 224
Reconfigure a Module Via Ladder Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 7

Table of Contents

Appendix D
I/O Tag Definitions 1715-AENTR Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
1715-IB16D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
1715-OB8DE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
1715-IF16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
1715-OF8I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Appendix E
History of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Preface

About This Publication This manual explains how to install and configure the 1715 Redundant I/O
System. This redundant, modular system works with a ControlLogix®
Enhanced Redundancy System. This system provides fault-tolerant I/O and
redundancy for use in critical process applications.

Download Firmware, AOP, Download firmware, associated files (such as AOP, EDS, and DTM), and access
product release notes from the Product Compatibility and Download Center at
EDS, and Other Files rok.auto/pcdc.

Summary of Changes This publication contains the following new or updated information. This list
includes substantive updates only and is not intended to reflect all changes.

Topic Page
Moved content that is related to SIL 2 safety applications to the ControlLogix in SIL 2
Applications Safety Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM001 Throughout
Updated UKCA certificate number 30

Additional Resources These documents contain additional information concerning related products
from Rockwell Automation.

Resource Description
1715 Redundant I/O System Technical Specifications, publication 1715-TD001 Provides technical specifications for components of the 1715 Redundant I/O System.
EtherNet/IP Network Configuration User Manual, publication ENET-UM001 Describes how you can use EtherNet/IP™ modules with your Logix 5000® controller and
communicate with various devices on the Ethernet network.
ControlLogix Enhanced Redundancy System, publication 1756-UM535 Provides design and configuration information for a ControlLogix Redundancy System.
Using ControlLogix in SIL 2 Applications Safety Reference Manual,
publication 1756-RM001 Describes the guidelines for using ControlLogix controllers in a SIL 2 safety application.
High Availability Systems Reference Manual, publication HIGHAV-RM002 Provides information to help design and plan high availability systems.
Designed to harmonize with NEMA Standards Publication No. ICS 1.1-1987 and provides
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of general guidelines for the application, installation, and maintenance of solid-state control in
Solid-state Control, publication SGI-1.1 the form of individual devices or packaged assemblies incorporating solid-state
components.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1 Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system.
Product Certifications website, rok.auto/certifications. Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.

You can view or download publications at rok.auto/literature.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 9

Notes:

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 1

Redundancy System

The 1715 Redundant I/O system lets a ControlLogix® controller communicate

to a remote, redundant I/O chassis by using EtherNet/IP™. The 1715 Redundant
I/O system provides fault tolerance and redundancy for critical processes by
using a redundant adapter pair and multiple I/O modules that have
diagnostics and are easily replaceable. The modular architecture lets you build
and adapt a system to suit the specific needs of an installation.

The 1715 Redundant I/O system consists of a two-slot adapter base unit that
houses a redundant adapter pair. The adapter base unit is connected to up to
eight I/O base units, which can hold up to 24 I/O modules (three I/O modules
per I/O base unit) when connected together. The I/O modules can be
configured in any combination of simplex or duplex pairs, depending on the
mode of operation needed. The I/O base units can be connected directly to the
adapter base unit and other I/O base units, or through expansion cables.

The 1715 Redundant I/O system is a modular system in which the adapter and
I/O base units snap together by using mating connectors and retaining clips to
form the backplane. One module in a duplex pair can be removed and replaced
without system interruption if the partner module is free of faults. The base
units, via termination assemblies, provide the interconnections for power,
adapter, and I/O data. Once connected, the base units form the single
mechanical assembly or backplane.

Required Software

Before you begin using your 1715 Redundant I/O System, verify that you have
the software that is required to install and configure your system:
• RSLogix 5000® programming software, version 20

Non-SIL 2 applications using revision 2.x of 1715 can use version 19.
• Studio 5000 environment, version 21 or later

ATTENTION: ControlLogix 5570 controllers are certified in RSLogix 5000

version 20 or later for SIL 2 operations. See the latest certifications for
software and firmware at rok.auto/certifications. See the TÜV website at
https://www.tuv.com/world/en/functional-safety-services.html for SIL 2
certification listings.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 11

Chapter 1 Redundancy System

Redundant 1715 Adapters

The redundant, partnered adapters monitor inputs/outputs and diagnostics

for the I/O in the remote chassis. If a fault occurs in one of the redundant
adapters, an IP address switchover occurs and I/O monitoring and
communication to the ControlLogix System continues without interruption.
This switchover is transparent to the user. Status indicators and status
information available to the ControlLogix application enables you to
determine the status of each 1715-AENTR adapter. See Appendix A.

1715 I/O Modules

Both digital and analog I/O modules are available for use in this system,
depending on your needs. I/O modules can be used in the following modes:
• Simplex mode (one module, simplex termination assembly)
• Duplex mode (two modules, duplex termination assembly)

Table 1 lists the 1715 modules that can be used in this system.
.

Table 1 - Modules Available for the 1715 Redundant I/O System

Cat. No. Description
1715-AENTR x 2 A pair of Ethernet adapters
1715-IB16D A 16-channel digital input module
1715-OB8DE An 8-channel digital output module
1715-IF16 A 16-channel analog input module
1715-OF8I An 8-channel analog output module

1715 I/O Modules in SIL 2 Applications

With the inclusion of diagnostics for the CIP™ messaging channel, the
1715 Redundant I/O system can be used for SIL 2 safety applications. For
information about SIL 2 safety applications, see the Using ControlLogix in
SIL 2 Applications Safety Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM001.

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 1 Redundancy System

System Architecture The 1715 Redundant I/O system operates with a pair of 1715-AENTR adapters.

When designing your control system by using the 1715 Redundant I/O system,
you can use digital and analog I/O modules in one of these ways:
• One I/O module in Simplex mode
• A pair of I/O modules that work in Duplex mode

Before you build your system, decide the layout of your I/O. You can add more
I/O modules at any time. The type of termination assembly installed, the
number of modules, and the AOP configuration determine whether the I/O
mode of operation is Simplex or Duplex.

The use of termination assemblies communicates the I/O mode of operation

that you choose (Simplex or Duplex) to your system through the backplane (the
adapter and I/O base units).

Termination Assemblies

The termination assembly (TA) matches your software configuration for

simplex or duplex. Attached to an I/O base, the TA can start in any slot and can
span multiple connected bases. When modules are used in Duplex mode, one
module can be absent and the system still runs.

Base Unit Structure

The adapter base unit is always the leftmost base unit in the connection chain.
The total length of the base unit connection chain, including all expansion
cables, cannot exceed 10 m (32.81 ft).

An adapter always occupies slot 0 or 1.

One chassis can support up to 8 I/O base units (up to 24 I/O modules).

1715-AENTR Adapters

The leftmost adapter position, or slot, is 0. The rightmost adapter slot is 1. One
redundant adapter pair always occupies slots 0 and 1 of the system. ‘A’
designates the primary adapter partner and ‘B’ designates the secondary
adapter partner of the redundant adapter pair. This system is designed to run
with two adapters. It can run with one adapter for a limited time while
replacing a damaged module, but ideally, needs both adapters running
simultaneously.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 13

Chapter 1 Redundancy System

IMPORTANT There is no method to configure a system to use only one 1715-AENTR

adapter. If you use only one 1715-AENTR adapter, the unused module
generates errors.
You can install or remove a partner adapter for replacement while the
1715 Redundant I/O system is operational. The Network status indicator
flashes green to identify the partner adapter. During replacement of the
module, there is a one-time, maximum 500 ms delay until the module
becomes a qualified partner.

I/O Modules

I/O module slots are numbered from 2…25, based on the distance from the
adapter base unit. If duplex I/O module pairs are used, the two modules of the
pair must be in adjacent slots. The left, lower slot number is considered the slot
number and address for the pair. Any combination of simplex modules and
duplex pairs can be used in one or more connected I/O base units.

IMPORTANT A partner I/O module can be installed or removed while the

1715 Redundant I/O system is operational without impact to the rest of
the system.

Module Positioning in the 1715 Redundant I/O System

There are 26 total slot positions in the system that is numbered from 0…25. The
first two positions always contain the redundant adapter pair, in slots 0 and 1.
The remaining positions begin numbering at slot 2 and contain the I/O
modules, ending at slot position number 25. Any combination of simplex or
duplex I/O module pairs can be used in the I/O base units. See Table 2 for a
sample of what a system could look like.

Expansion cables can be used to connect base units, as shown in Figure 1 on

page 15.

The sample system configuration in Example 1 does not match the system layout
that is displayed in Example 2. Example 1 and Example 2 are different examples of
possible configurations that you can have for your system.

Table 2 - Example 1 - A Sample System Configuration

Module Position/Slot Number by Base Unit
System Slot Number Base Unit Type Module Designation
Type
0 Adapter 0 Adapter A
1 Adapter 1 Adapter B
2 I/O 01 First I/O base unit Module A of first duplex pair
3 I/O 02 Module B of first duplex pair
4 I/O 03 Module A of second duplex pair
5 I/O 04 Second I/O base unit Module B of second duplex pair
6 I/O 05 First simplex module
7 I/O 06 Module A of third duplex pair
8 I/O 07 Third I/O base unit Module B of third duplex pair

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 1 Redundancy System

Table 2 - Example 1 - A Sample System Configuration

Module Position/Slot Number by Base Unit
System Slot Number Base Unit Type Module Designation
Type
9 I/O 08 Second simplex module
10 I/O 09 Third simplex module
11…25 I/O 10…24 Fourth…eighth I/O base unit Any combination of simplex/duplex pair modules

Figure 1 - Example 2 - A Sample System Layout

TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA

Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual.

Module Status Module Status Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy

Healthy
Redundancy Status Redundancy Status Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready
Ready
Network Status Network Status Run Run Run Run Run
Run
Rack Status Rack Status Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00
Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01
Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02
Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03
Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04
Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05
Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1
Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06
Ethernet 2 Ethernet 2
Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07

Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08

Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09
Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10
Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11
Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12
Reset Reset
Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13
Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14
Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15

1715-A310

1715-A310
IO BASE

IO BASE
TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA

Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual.

Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy

Healthy
Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready
Ready
Run Run Run Run Run Run Run Run
Run
Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00
Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01
Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02
Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03
Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04
Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05
Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06
Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07

Channel 08 Channel 08
Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08
Channel 09 Channel 09
Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09
Channel 10 Channel 10
Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10
Channel 11 Channel 11
Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11
Channel 12 Channel 12
Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12
Channel 13 Channel 13
Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13
Channel 14 Channel 14
Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14
Channel 15 Channel 15
Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15
1715-A310

1715-A310

1715-A310
IO BASE

IO BASE

IO BASE

TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA

Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual.

Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy

Healthy
Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready
Ready
Run Run Run Run Run Run Run Run
Run
Channel 01 Channel 00 Channel 00
Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00
Channel 02 Channel 01 Channel 01
Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01
Channel 03 Channel 02 Channel 02
Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02
Channel 04 Channel 03 Channel 03
Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03
Channel 05 Channel 04 Channel 04
Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04
Channel 06 Channel 05 Channel 05
Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05
Channel07 Channel 06 Channel 06
Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06
Channel 08 Channel 07 Channel 07
Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07

Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08

Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09
Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10
Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11
Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12
Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13
Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14
Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15
1715-A310

1715-A310

1715-A310
IO BASE

IO BASE

IO BASE

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 15

Chapter 1 Redundancy System

Lay Out the Hardware This section discusses how to lay out the hardware for the system by topology.

System Context

The redundant I/O subsystem must be connected to one ControlLogix

redundancy system, or any Logix system that supports I/O via the
EtherNet/IP network. The topologies that the 1756-EN2T or 1756-EN2TR
modules support, Device Level Ring (DLR) and star, establish all connections
via the EtherNet/IP network.

For more information about DLR topologies, see the EtherNet/IP Device Level
Ring Application Technique, publication ENET-AT007.

Figure 2 - 1715 Redundant I/O System DLR (Ring) Topology Attached to a 1756 ControlLogix Enhanced Redundancy System

1756 ControlLogix 1756 ControlLogix

Primary Chassis Secondary Chassis

1756 RM Cable
1756-EN2TR

1756-EN2TR
1756-RM2

1756-RM2

TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA

Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual.
1715-AENTR

1715-AENTR

1715-I/O
1715-I/O
1715-I/O

1715-I/O

1715-I/O
1715-I/O
1715-A310

1715-A310
IO BASE

IO BASE

1715 Redundant I/O System

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 1 Redundancy System

Figure 3 - 1715 Redundant I/O System Star Topology Attached to a 1756 ControlLogix Enhanced Redundancy System

1756 ControlLogix 1756 ControlLogix

Primary Chassis Secondary Chassis

1756 RM Cable

1756-EN2T

1756-RM2

1756-RM2
1756-EN2T
Ethernet
Switch

TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA

Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual.
1715-AENTR

1715-AENTR

1715-I/O
1715-I/O
1715-I/O

1715-I/O

1715-I/O
1715-I/O
1715-A310

1715-A310
IO BASE

IO BASE

1715 Redundant I/O System

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 17

Chapter 1 Redundancy System

To help prevent ground loops that are caused by shielded cables, RJ45 shields
on the Ethernet ports on the 1715 adapter base unit are connected to earth
through a parallel resistance /capacitance circuit arrangement as shown in
Figure 4.

Figure 4 - Shield Termination Arrangement to Help Prevent Ground Loops

RJ45 Shield

Resistor
Transient Protection Device
Capacitor

This complies with the shield grounding guidance that is given in The CIP
Networks Library, Volume 2, Edition 1.21, section 8-9.4.3. ©ODVA, Inc. 2016.

For more information regarding ODVA, visit www.odva.org.

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 1 Redundancy System

Simplex Architecture

Simplex I/O modules fail-safe on the first detected module fault.

Figure 5 - Simplex Architecture - Input and Output

Adapter

I/P O/P Final Elements

Adapter

Digital Input Simplex Digital Output Simplex

Termination Assembly Termination Assembly

1715- 1715-
TASIB16D TASOB8DE

CIP Network TERMINAL IDENTITY

CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

AOTA AOTA AOTA

Dual. Dual. Dual.

1715-AENTR

1715-AENTR

1715-OB8DE
1715-IB16D
ControlLogix

1715-A310
IO BASE
Adapter I/O Base Units
Base Unit

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 19

Chapter 1 Redundancy System

Duplex Architecture

An example configuration of dual-input modules and adapters, and an output

module is shown in Figure 6. A redundant input or redundant output module
provides fault tolerance for module and channel failures.

Figure 6 - Duplex Architecture Duplex Inputs, Simplex Output

I/P
Adapter O/P

I/P Adapter

CIP Network

ControlLogix

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 1 Redundancy System

Figure 7 - Duplex Architecture Inputs and Outputs

I/P ADAPTER O/P

SENSORS FINAL
ELEMENTS

I/P ADAPTER O/P

CIP NETWORK
1715- 1715-
TADIB16D TADOB8DE
CLX
TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA

Dual. AOTA AOTA
Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual.

1715-OB8DE

1715-OB8DE
1715-AENTR

1715-AENTR

1715-IB16D
1715-IB16D

1715-A310

1715-A310
IO BASE

IO BASE
1715-A2A 1715-A3IO 1715-A3IO

Termination assemblies can span across I/O base units.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 21

Chapter 1 Redundancy System

Mixed Architecture

There can be a mixture of architectures within one system. Figure 8 shows

simplex and dual I/O configurations.

Figure 8 - Mixed Architecture

I/P O/P

SENSORS FINAL
ADAPTER ELEMENTS

I/P O/P

ADAPTER

SENSORS FINAL
I/P O/P ELEMENTS
CIP NETWORK

CLX

1715- 1715- 1715- 1715-

TASIB16D TASOB8DE
TADIB16D TADOB8DE
TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA

Dual. AOTA AOTA
Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual.
1715-AENTR

1715-AENTR

1715-OB8DE

1715-OB8DE

1715-OB8DE
1715-IB16D
1715-IB16D

1715-IB16D
1715-A310

1715-A310
IO BASE

IO BASE

1715-A2A 1715-A3IO 1715-A3IO

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 1 Redundancy System

Bus Diagram

A detailed drawing of the backplane is shown Figure 9.

Figure 9 - Bus Diagram of 1715 Redundant I/O System

Switchover Considerations Each 1715 Redundant I/O system uses one IP address as the primary IP address
for all communication on the EtherNet/IP network. The redundant adapter
pair consists of two active modules, a primary adapter and its partner, a
secondary module. For this document, the primary module is referred to as
module ‘A’ and the secondary module is referred to as module ‘B’.

On power-up, the adapter in the leftmost slot is considered the primary

module (when two adapters are present) because it uses the primary IP
address, and because it is the module responsible for receiving/transmitting to
ControlLogix controller on the EtherNet/IP network.

The module in the rightmost slot is considered the secondary module partner
and uses the primary IP address +1. For example, if the primary module in the
leftmost slot has an IP address of ‘N’, then the secondary module in the
rightmost slot, has an IP address of ‘N+1’.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 23

Chapter 1 Redundancy System

Both modules are always active and are responsible for monitoring all inputs
and outputs, monitoring diagnostics in the system, and reading and writing
data from/to I/O simultaneously. When the primary module receives a write, it
notifies the secondary module of the data to write and which module to write it
to. At a synchronized point in time, both adapters physically write to the I/O.

The adapters negotiate which module is primary, depending on the status of

the system. If the primary module is unable to perform its role, for example, if
a fault occurs in the primary module, then the secondary module becomes the
new primary, assuming the IP address of the primary module, taking over the
role of communication. The primary module is the only module of the pair that
produces data on the EtherNet/IP network.

If there is a fault, the IP address swapping between the primary module and
the secondary module takes no longer than 20 ms from the time of the
initiating fault. The secondary module is the new primary and handles all
communication. (Depending on the structure of your Ethernet configuration,
this time can be impacted.)

This IP address swap is transparent to the user. You can detect which module
the primary module is by examining the Network status indicator near the top
of each adapter. On the primary adapter, the Network status indicator is
steady green; on the secondary adapter, the Network status indicator flashes
green.

Once a swap occurs, the new primary module remains the primary unless
there is a good reason to swap over again.

Obtaining a New IP Address

The IP address of the primary module is stored in the adapter base unit. If a
stored primary IP address is available, the adapter uses that address. If a
stored primary IP address is not available, then the adapter uses BOOTP/
DHCP to obtain an IP address.

The adapter transmits DHCP requests, but is able to process a BOOTP/DHCP

response from either a DHCP or BOOTP server. If the BOOTP/DHCP request is
unsuccessful, the secondary adapter (that is, Module B), attempts to obtain the
IP address of the primary module through BOOTP/DHCP.

The adapters continue to attempt a BOOTP/DHCP configuration until an IP

address is obtained, alternating between adapters A and B. Once an adapter
has obtained the IP address, the secondary module can use that IP address + 1.

Once an adapter has a primary IP address, it confirms that it does not have a
duplicate IP address. See EtherNet/IP Network Configuration User Manual,
publication ENET-UM001. The Network status indicator displays duplicated
IP addresses by showing steady red. For additional information about
assigning an IP address for the first time, see Assign an IP Address on
page 103.

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 1 Redundancy System

Ethernet Topology

The 1715 Redundant I/O system supports Device Level Ring (DLR) and star
topologies.

For DLR, the Ethernet ports of the adapters are configured with the outward-
facing ports (Port 1 of Module A and Port 2 of Module B) operating as a 2-port
switch. Port 2 of Module A and Port 1 of Module B must be connected together
with an Ethernet patch cable.

Figure 10 - DLR Topology

Module B
Module A Port 1
Port 1
Module Status Module Status
Redundancy Status
Network Status
Redundancy Status
Network Status
Port 2
Port 2 Rack Status Rack Status

Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1
Ethernet 2 Ethernet 2

Reset Reset

For a star topology, the Ethernet ports of the adapters are configured with the
leftmost ports (Port 1 of Module A and Port 1of Module B) operating as a 2-port
switch. The rightmost ports on each adapter are left unused.

Figure 11 - Star Topology

Module B
Module A Port 1
Port 1 Module Status
Redundancy Status
Module Status
Redundancy Status
Port 2
Network Status Network Status
Port 2 Rack Status Rack Status

Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1
Ethernet 2 Ethernet 2

Reset Reset

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 25

Chapter 1 Redundancy System

For Ethernet considerations, see EtherNet/IP Network Configuration User

Manual, publication ENET-UM001, and ControlLogix Redundancy User
Manual, publication 1756-UM535.

Communication on the EtherNet/IP Network

Communication to a simplex module is addressed to the slot number for that

module. CIP™ communication to modules in a duplex configuration, including
the adapters, is addressed to the lowest slot number for the module pair.

The adapters respond with CIP errors for attempts to communicate to an I/O
module of a type that is not the same as the physically installed module.

The termination assembly type (simplex/duplex) determines the CIP messages

for corresponding CIP objects that the adapter processes for each I/O module.

System Performance This section describes connections and RPI settings for the system.

Connections

The adapter has one required connection and does not support a rack
connection. Each I/O module has one required connection (simplex or duplex).
For example, the system in Figure 12 has five I/O modules. Four are duplex and
one is simplex. They are all configured for data connection.

Figure 12 - Duplex and Simplex Connections

Figure 12 shows six connections—one for each entry in the configuration.

Table 3 - RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 Logix Designer Configuration

Connection Module Duplex/Simplex Module Description
1 1715-AENTR Duplex Ethernet Adapter
1 1715-IB16D Duplex 16-point Digital Input
1 1715-OB8DE Duplex 8-point Diagnostic Digital Output
1 1715-IF16 Duplex 16-point Analog Input
1 1715-OF8I Duplex 8-point Analog Digital Input
1 1715-IF16 Simplex 16-point Analog Input

The digital input module connections use change-of state-triggers, and the
adapter and analog module connections use cyclic triggers.

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 1 Redundancy System

RPI

The RPI you set specifies the maximum amount of time between data updates.
The 1715 modules support an RPI range of 60…750 ms.

Cat. No. Minimum RPI Maximum RPI Default RPI

1715-AENTR 180 ms
1715-IB16D 60 ms
1715-OB8DE 60 ms 750 ms 60 ms
1715-IF16 120 ms
1715-OF8I 120 ms

IMPORTANT Chassis that are near the maximum capacity can have connection
timeouts during normal operation when the RPI is set to the minimum
value. Test the system to validate the configuration.

Connection and Data Format

The adapter and I/O modules each support one data connection for input/
output data. Listen Only connections are not supported.

Timestamping A time stamp is the time that an event occurred. It is recorded by the 1715
system and passed to ControlLogix. Time stamp resolution is in µs, but 1715 is
accurate to 10 ms typical.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 27

Chapter 1 Redundancy System

Notes:

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2

Installation Instructions

This chapter explains how to build the 1715 Redundant I/O system. These
installation instructions include how to build the backplane by connecting the
adapter and I/O base units and mounting them on DIN rails within a cabinet,
how to install and wire the termination assemblies, how to mount the adapter
and the I/O modules onto the system, and how to use expansion cables to allow
for additional space requirements for the system within an enclosure.

Environment and Enclosure

ATTENTION: This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment, in overvoltage Category II
applications (as defined in IEC 60664-1), at altitudes up to 2000 m (6562 ft) without derating.
This equipment is not intended for use in residential environments and may not provide adequate protection to radio
communication services in such environments.
This equipment is supplied as open-type equipment. It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for
those specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to help prevent personal injury
resulting from accessibility to live parts. The enclosure must have suitable flame-retardant properties to help prevent or
minimize the spread of flame, complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA or be approved for the application if non-
metallic. The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool. Subsequent sections of this publication
may contain additional information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain
product safety certifications.
In addition to this publication, see the following:
• Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1, for additional installation requirements
• NEMA Standard 250 and IEC 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by enclosures

Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

ATTENTION: This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which can cause internal damage and affect normal
operation. Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wriststrap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• Use a static-safe workstation, if available.
• Store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging when not in use.

ATTENTION: Do not insert or remove a module, base unit, or termination assembly while power is applied. Interruption of the
backplane can result in unintentional operation or machine motion.

ATTENTION: For UL approved installations, the 1715-OB8DE output power source must be isolating, wired with a minimum of
0.75 mm2 (18 AWG) wire and fused with a rating of 32V DC min/5 A max.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 29

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

ATTENTION: Do not wire more than 1 conductor on any single terminal.

ATTENTION: This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation.

European and United Kingdom Hazardous Location Approval

The following applies when the product bears the Ex Marking.
This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 2014/34/EU and UK
Statutory Instrument (UKSI) 2016:1107 as amended by UKSI 2019:696, and has been found to comply with the Essential Health and
Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in Zone 2 potentially
explosive atmospheres.
Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with IEC/EN 60079-0, Explosive
atmospheres – Part 0: Equipment – General requirements and IEC/EN 60079-7, Explosive atmospheres – Part 7: Equipment protection
by increased safety “e”.
ATEX/UKCA certification: Ex ec IIC T4 Gc
ATEX certificate number: 11 ATEX 7928686X
UKCA certificate number: UL22UKEX2512X
IECEx certification: II 3G Ex ec IIC T4 Gc
IECEx certificate number: IECEx UL 15.0032X
The ambient temperature range is -25…+60 °C (-13…+140 °F) for all models.
Special Conditions for Safe Use:
• All models: The ambient temperature range is -25 …+60 °C (-13…+140 °F).
• Subject devices are to be installed in a tool-only accessible enclosure that provides a degree of protection not less than IP54 in
accordance with IEC/EN 60079-0, Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements and IEC/EN 60079-7, Explosive
atmospheres - Part 7: Equipment protection by increased safety "e". Enclosure is to be marked with the following: "Warning - Do not
open when energized". After installation of subject devices into the enclosure, access to termination compartments shall be
dimensioned so that conductors can be readily connected. Grounding conductor should have a minimum cross-sectional area of
3.31 mm² (12 AWG).
• Subject devices are for use in an area of not more than pollution degree 2 in accordance with IEC 60664-1.
• Subject devices are to use conductors with a minimum conductor temperature rating of 85 °C (185 °F).
• Subject devices are to be installed in the vertical orientation only.

WARNING:
• This equipment shall be mounted in an enclosure with a minimum ingress protection rating of at least IP54 (as defined in
IEC60529) in accordance with IEC/EN 60079-0, Explosive atmospheres – Part 0: Equipment – General requirements and IEC/
EN 60079-7, Explosive atmospheres – Part 7: Equipment protection by increased safety “e”. The equipment shall be used in a
Pollution Degree 2 environment (as defined in IEC 60664-1) when used in Zone 2 environments. The enclosure shall be the
type that can only be opened, or the type with a cover that can only be removed by the use of a tool.
• This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Rockwell Automation.
• Provision shall be made to help prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 140%
of the rated voltage when applied in Zone 2 environments.
• This equipment must be used only with ATEX and UKCA-certified Rockwell Automation Termination Assemblies.
• Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws, sliding latches, threaded connectors, or other
means provided with this product.
• Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous.
• Enclosure must be marked with the following: ‘Warning - Do not open when energized.’ After installation of equipment into
the enclosure, access to termination compartments shall be dimensioned so that conductors can be readily connected.

For ATEX, IECEx, and UKCA certificates, go to rok.auto/certifications.

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Multi-point Network Communication Connections

WARNING: If you connect or disconnect the communication cable with power
applied to this module or any device on the network, an electric arc can occur.
This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before
proceeding.

Field-side Power
WARNING: If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-wire power is on,
an electric arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location
installations. Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before
proceeding.

Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) Fuses

WARNING: If you insert or remove a base unit or termination assembly while
power is applied, an electric arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in
hazardous location installations.
Be sure that power is removed before proceeding.

WARNING: Do not remove or replace fuses when energized. This could cause an
explosion in hazardous location installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before
proceeding.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 31

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

North American Hazardous Location Approval

The following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous Informations sur l'utilisation de cet équipement en environnements
locations. dangereux.
Les produits marqués ‘CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D’ ne
conviennent qu'à une utilisation en environnements de
Products marked ‘CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D’ are suitable for use in Classe I Division 2 Groupes A, B, C, D dangereux et non
Class I Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D, Hazardous Locations and dangereux. Chaque produit est livré avec des marquages sur
nonhazardous locations only. Each product is supplied with sa plaque d'identification qui indiquent le code de
markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous température pour les environnements dangereux. Lorsque
location temperature code. When combining products within a plusieurs produits sont combinés dans un système, le code
system, the most adverse temperature code (lowest ‘T’ number) de température le plus défavorable (code de température le
be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the plus faible) peut être utilisé pour déterminer le code de
system. Combinations of equipment in your system are subject température global du système. Les combinaisons
to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the d'équipements dans le système sont sujettes à inspection
time of installation. par les autorités locales qualifiées au moment de
l'installation.
RISQUE D’EXPLOSION –
• Couper le courant ou s'assurer que
l'environnement est classé non
EXPLOSION HAZARD
dangereux avant de débrancher
• Do not disconnect equipment unless l'équipement.
power has been removed or the area is • Couper le courant ou s'assurer que
known to be nonhazardous. l'environnement est classé non
• Do not disconnect connections to this dangereux avant de débrancher les
equipment unless power has been connecteurs. Fixer tous les
removed or the area is known to be connecteurs externes reliés à cet
nonhazardous. Secure any external équipement à l'aide de vis, loquets
connections that mate to this equipment coulissants, connecteurs filetés ou
by using screws, sliding latches, autres moyens fournis avec ce
threaded connectors, or other means produit.
provided with this product. • La substitution de composants
• Substitution of components may impair peut rendre cet équipement
suitability for Class I, Division 2. inadapté à une utilisation en
• If this product contains batteries, they environnement de Classe I, Division
must only be changed in an area known 2.
to be nonhazardous. • S'assurer que l'environnement est
classé non dangereux avant de
changer les piles.

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Before You Begin This section lists important information that you must consider before
starting to build your 1715 Redundant I/O system:
• Review the parts list and identify the system components.
• Review the power requirements for the system and for field devices.
• Review design considerations for heating and cooling.
• Specify an enclosure.
• Install the necessary software.

Make Sure that Warranty is Not Compromised

ATTENTION: Failing to install retaining clips and properly secure the Terminal
Assembly (TA) can lead to connector / pin damage on the modules and the
1715-A3IO. Failure to comply with this Attention Notice will render the Warranty
void and the equipment will not be covered.

Graphical Representation

IMPORTANT Throughout this manual, some graphics do not depict the actual
hardware as required. These graphics are for representational
purposes only and do not necessarily reflect the actual component
layout of your system.

Parts List

These parts are available to build a 1715 Redundant I/O system. Their
description and catalog part numbers are as follows.

Table 4 - Parts Table

Cat. No. Description
1715-AENTR Communication adapter
1715-IB16D 16-channel digital input module
1715-OB8DE 8-channel digital output module
1715-IF16 16-channel analog input module
1715-OF8I 8-channel analog output module
1715-A2A 2-slot communication adapter base unit
1715-A3IO 3-slot I/O base unit
1715-TASIB16D Termination assembly - digital input simplex
1715-TADIB16D Termination assembly - digital input duplex
1715-TASOB8DE Termination assembly - digital output simplex
1715-TADOB8DE Termination assembly - digital output duplex
1715-TASIF16 Termination assembly - analog input simplex
1715-TADIF16 Termination assembly - analog input duplex
1715-TASOF8 Termination assembly - analog output simplex
1715-TADOF8 Termination assembly - analog output duplex
1715-N2T Tall slot filler cover
1715-N2S Short slot filler cover
1715-C2 Expansion cable - 2 m

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 33

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Required Tools

The installation and maintenance of the 1715 Redundant I/O system requires
these tools:
• Screwdriver, 0.8 x 9.0 mm (1/25 x 3/8 in.), for module clamp screws and
slot filler covers
• Torque screwdriver, 0.6 x 3.0 mm (1/40 x 1/8 in.), for DC power wiring
terminals
• Torque screwdriver, 0.4 x 2.0 mm (1/64 x 5/64 in.), for field wiring
terminals
• Two open-end wrenches, 10 mm (0.39 in.), for ground stud nuts
• A 2.5 mm (0.10 in.) Allen wrench

Spacing Requirements

You must consider spacing requirements before mounting your system.

IMPORTANT Make sure that you meet the minimum spacing requirements shown.
Allow 15.3…20 cm (6.0…8.0 in.) between chassis and a heat source, and
chassis and cabinet, and allow 5.1 cm (2.0 in.) between wireway and top
or bottom of chassis.

Dimensions are in cm (in.).

Figure 13 - Cabinet

15.3 (6.0)

TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY
TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA

AOTA AOTA Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual.
AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA
Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual.

Module Status Module Status Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy

Healthy Healthy Healthy
Module Status Module Status Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Ready Ready
Redundancy Status Redundancy Status Ready Ready Ready Ready
Redundancy Status Redundancy Status Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready
Ready Network Status Run Run Run Run
Run Run Network Status Run Run
Network Status Network Status Run Run Run Run
Rack Status Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01
Channel 01 Channel 01 Rack Status
Rack Status Rack Status Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 02 Channel 02
Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02
Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03
Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04
Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05
Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06
Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07
Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07 Ethernet 2 Ethernet 2 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08
Ethernet 2 Ethernet 2 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08

Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09

Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09
Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10
Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10
Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11
Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11

10.2 (4.0)
Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12
Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12

10.2 (4.0)
Reset Reset Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13
Reset Reset Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13
Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14
Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14
Channel15 Channel15 Channel15 Channel15
Channel15 Channel15 Channel15 Channel15
Channel 16 Channel 16 Channel 16 Channel 16
Channel 16 Channel 16 Channel 16 Channel 16
1715-A310

1715-A310
1715-A310

1715-A310

IO BASE

IO BASE
IO BASE

IO BASE

15.3…20 (6.0…8.0)

TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1
TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA

Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual.
AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA
Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual.

Module Status Module Status Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy

Healthy
Redundancy Status Redundancy Status Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready
Ready Module Status Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy
Run Run Module Status Healthy Healthy
Network Status Network Status Run Run Run Run Ready Ready
Redundancy Status Redundancy Status Ready Ready Ready Ready
Rack Status Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Network Status Run Run Run Run
Rack Status Network Status Run Run
Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02
Rack Status Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01
Channel 03 Channel 03 Rack Status
Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 02 Channel 02
Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02
Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03
Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04
Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05
Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06
Ethernet 2 Ethernet 2 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07
Ethernet 2 Ethernet 2 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08

Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09

Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10
Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09
Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11
Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10
Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12
Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11
Reset Reset Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13
Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12
Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14
Reset Reset Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13
Channel15 Channel15 Channel15 Channel15
Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14
Channel 16 Channel 16 Channel 16 Channel 16
Channel15 Channel15 Channel15 Channel15
1715-A310

1715-A310
IO BASE

IO BASE

Channel 16 Channel 16 Channel 16 Channel 16

1715-A310

1715-A310
IO BASE

IO BASE

5.1 (2.0)

Wireway
5.1 (2.0)

TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1
TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA

Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA
Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual.

Module Status Module Status Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy

Healthy Module Status Healthy Healthy
Ready Ready Module Status Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy
Redundancy Status Redundancy Status Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready
Run Redundancy Status Redundancy Status Ready Ready Ready Ready
Network Status Network Status Run Run Run Run Run
Network Status Network Status Run Run Run Run Run
Run
Rack Status Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01
Rack Status Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01
Channel 02 Channel 02 Rack Status Rack Status
Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02
Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02
Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03
Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03
Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04
Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04
Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05
Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05

7.7…10.2
Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06
Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07 Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07 Channel07
Ethernet 2 Ethernet 2 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Ethernet 2 Ethernet 2 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08

Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09

Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09
Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10
Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10
Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11
Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11
Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12
Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12
Reset Reset Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13
Reset Reset Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13
Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14
Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14
Channel15 Channel15 Channel15 Channel15
Channel15 Channel15 Channel15 Channel15
Channel 16 Channel 16 Channel 16 Channel 16
Channel 16 Channel 16 Channel 16 Channel 16
1715-A310

1715-A310

1715-A310

1715-A310
IO BASE

IO BASE

IO BASE

IO BASE

(3.0…4.0)
15.3 (6.0)

IMPORTANT When you install the modules into an I/O base unit, note that the bases
are intended to be mounted only horizontally. Install the modules in the
I/O base unit only in a vertical orientation.

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

System Hardware The 1715 Redundant I/O System is a remote redundant I/O system that was
Components developed to communicate with a Logix controller in a ControlLogix®
enhanced redundant system by using the EtherNet/IP™ network and includes
these components:
• A pair of 1715-AENTR adapters serves as a ‘proxy’ for all EtherNet/IP
communication to and from redundant I/O modules.
• 1715 digital and analog I/O modules.
• A 1715-A2A dual redundant I/O adapter base unit connects to a
1715-A3IO I/O module base unit to form the backplane for the system.
• Termination assemblies are available in Simplex and Duplex
configuration. They mount onto the 1715-A3IO I/O module base unit, and
connect the I/O modules to the I/O wiring.
• Each 1715-A3IO I/O base unit holds up to three I/O modules. Up to
24 I/O modules can be added to the system.
• The system is built on DIN rails within a cabinet enclosure.
• 1715-C2 expansion cables can be used to allow for space restrictions of the
system within the cabinet.

IMPORTANT Conformal coating is standard on all 1715 modules.

TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA

Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual.

Module Status Module Status Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy

Healthy
Redundancy Status Redundancy Status Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready
Ready
Network Status Network Status Run Run Run Run Run
Run
Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00
Rack Status Rack Status Channel 00
Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01
Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02
Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03
Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04
Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05
Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06
Ethernet 2 Ethernet 2 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07

Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08

Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09
Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10
Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11
Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12
Reset Reset
Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13
Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14
Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15
1715-A310

1715-A310
IO BASE

IO BASE

The general system layout for the 1715 Redundant I/O system consists of the
following hardware components.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 35

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

1715-AENTR Adapter Redundant Pair

The 1715 adapter communicates via the EtherNet/IP network to a

1756 ControlLogix controller, which conveys system I/O data.

Figure 14 - 1715-AENTR Adapter

ADAPTER
1715-AENTR 1715-AENTR Redundant Adapter Pair

ADAPTER ADAPTER
1715-AENTR 1715-AENTR

Module Status
Module Status Module Status
Redundancy Status Redundancy Status Redundancy Status
Network Status Network Status
Network Status Rack Status Rack Status

Rack Status

Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1
Ethernet 2 Ethernet 2

Ethernet 1
Reset Reset
Ethernet 2

32096-M 32096-M

Reset

Do not open this module door, or plug or

insert anything into the port.

32096 M

IMPORTANT Do not open this module door, or plug or insert anything into the port
behind the module door unless instructed to do so by technical support.

1715 Digital and Analog I/O Modules

Your system can be configured with any combination of I/O modules, and in
either Simplex or Duplex mode. These I/O modules can be included in your
system:
• 1715-IB16D 16-channel digital input module
• 1715-OB8DE 8-channel digital output module
• 1715-IF16 16-channel analog input module
• 1715-OF8I 8-channel analog output module

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Figure 15 - 1715 Digital and Analog I/O Modules

1715-IB16D 16-channel Digital Input 1715-OB8DE 8-channel Digital Output 1715-IF16 16-channel Analog Input 1715-OF8I8 8-channel Analog Output
Module Module Module Module

DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL OUTPUT ANALOG INPUT ANALOG OUTPUT

1715-IB16D 1715-OB8DE 1715-IF16 1715-OF8I

Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy

Ready Ready Ready Ready
Run Run Run Run
Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00
Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01
Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02
Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03
Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04
Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05
Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06
Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07

Channel 08 Channel 08
Channel 09 Channel 09
Channel 10 Channel 10
Channel 11 Channel 11
Channel 12 Channel 12
Channel 13 Channel 13
Channel 14 Channel 14
Channel 15 Channel 15

32092 M 32090 M 32091 M 32089 M

1715-A2A Adapter Base Unit

The adapter base unit holds a pair of adapters.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 37

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Adapter Base Unit Fuses

The 1715-A2A adapter base unit contains four fuses.

To replace the fuses, follow this procedure.

1. Lift the door to access the fuses.

The fuses are labeled from F1…F4, from left to right. The replacement fuse
part number is Littelfuse 0154004.DRT.
2. With a pair of small long-nosed pliers, remove and replace the blown
fuse.

Lift door to access fuses

Fuses

Use replacement fuse 4 A slow blow fuses in OMNI-BLOK holders

manufactured by Littelfuse. Remove and replace with a pair of
long-nosed pliers.

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Figure 16 - Power Routing of Adapter Base Unit Fuses

PWR-1
Left Power Connector

PWR-2
Right Power Connector

Slot 0 Slot 1

Fuses F1 and F3 have independent tags under the 1715-AENTR module status
flags. For example, in Figure 17, F3 is blown or adapter power is missing to the
PWR-2 connector.

Figure 17 - Fuse Tags

The F2 and F4 fusing faults of the 1715 I/O modules cannot be pinpointed. All
healthy I/O module status indicators showing solid red indicates a blown F2 or
F4 fuse.

The adapter tags indicate each individual I/O module tag, ModAFault and
ModBFault, as shown in Figure 18.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 39

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Figure 18 - Adapter Tags Indicate Faults

IMPORTANT After any fuse replacement or power-related issue on PWR-1/PWR-2,

the Reset button on the 1715-AENTR must be pressed to clear the fault
and reset the status indicator back to solid green.

1715-A3IO I/O Base Unit

The I/O base unit holds up to three I/O modules.

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

I/O Termination Assemblies

I/O termination assemblies are inserted into the I/O base units. There are
eight types of termination assemblies (two for each module) depending on the
architecture of your system and the I/O modules you are going to use.

Table 5 - I/O Termination Assembly Descriptions

I/O Module Termination Assembly Cat. No. Termination Assembly Description
1715-TASIB16D Digital input simplex
1715-IB16D
1715-TADIB16D Digital input duplex
1715-TAS0B8DE Digital output simplex
1715-OB8DE
1715-TADOB8DE Digital output duplex
1715-TASIF16 Analog input simplex
1715-IF16
1715-TADIF16 Analog input duplex
1715-TASOF8 Analog output simplex
1715-OF8I
1715-TADOF8 Analog output duplex

Digital Input Termination Assemblies

Digital input termination assemblies support these features:

• 16-channel simplex TA provides termination for 16 digital input channels
• Industry-standard field device connections at terminal blocks
• 24V DC digital input channels with a load of 5.11 kper input channel
• Individually fused channels with over voltage input protection

There are two types of digital input termination assemblies:

• A 1715-TASIB16D, 16-channel simplex TA that provides termination for 16
digital input channels and mates with one 1715-IB16D digital input
module
• A 1715-TADIB16D, 16-channel duplex TA that provides termination for 16
digital input channels and mates with up to two 1715-IB16D digital input
modules

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 41

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Figure 19 - 1715-TASIB16D and 1715-TADIB16D Digital Input Termination Assemblies

1715-TASIB16D 1715-TADIB16D
Digital Input Simplex Digital Input Duplex
Termination Assembly Termination Assembly

Field Connections This Side

Terminal Block Cable Entry This Side
CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8CH9 CH10CH11CH12CH13CH14CH15

Channel -

Channel +
OV OV CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3

TB1 TB2
CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 Fuse
Fuse Holder

CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 FS1 FS3 FS5 FS7 FS9 FS11 FS13 FS15
TB1 TB2

F1 FH1
FS2 FS4 FS6 FS8 FS10 FS12 FS14 FS16
FH6
FH2

FH5

FH8
FH3

FH4

FH7
FH1

Fuse
FH10

FH16
FH12

FH14

FH15
FH13
FH11
FH9

Covers J1 J2 J3 J4

c c c c
16 16 16 16
J1 J2 Fuse Cover
c c
16 16

Coding Pegs
1 1 1 1
Coding Pegs

32095 32120 -M
1 1
c b a c b a 32120 M

Fuse Type: T9901 50 mA (Pack of 20). Remove and replace fuses with a pair of long-nosed pliers.

The simplex termination assembly routes the input signals to one input
module. In duplex arrangements, the input signals are routed to two parallel
modules.

See page 76 for detailed wiring instructions.

Digital Output Termination Assemblies

Digital output termination assemblies support these features:

• Provide connections for eight output channels
• Industry-standard field device connectors
• 24V DC operation
• Provide a fused field voltage supply to the module

There are two types of digital output termination assemblies:

• A 1715-TASOB8DE digital output, 24V DC, 8-channel, simplex TA that
provides termination for 8 digital output channels and mates with one
1715-OB8DE digital output module
• A 1715-TADOB8DE digital output, 24V DC 8-channel duplex TA that
provides fault tolerant operation for 8 digital output channels and mates
with redundant 1715-OB8DE digital output modules

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Figure 20 - 1715-TASOB8DE and 1715-TADOB8DE Digital Output Termination Assemblies

1715-TASOB8DE 1715-TADOB8DE
Digital Output Simplex Digital Output Duplex
Termination Assembly Termination Assembly

Field Connections Entry This Side Field Connections This Side

Ov V1+ Ov V2+ Ov V1+ Ov V2+

Ov V1+ Ov V2+ Ov V1+ Ov V2+

CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7

CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7
TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4
TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4

FH1 FH2
TEST

10 A Fuse 10 A Fuse
FH1 FH2
J1 J2

c c
J1

Coding Pegs

Coding Pegs

32093 M TA 32121 M
32121 -M

Fuse type: Littelfuse Type 451 Omni-Block 10 A, 125V fast acting fuse. Surface Mount Fuse Block 154 010 for Digital Output
Termination Assemblies. Use a pair of long-nosed pliers for fuse removal and replacement.

See page 81 for detailed wiring instructions.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 43

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Analog Input Termination Assemblies

Analog input termination assemblies support these features:

• 16 input channels for a simplex/duplex configuration
• Industry-standard field device connections at the terminal blocks
• Analog input channels with a high reliability 120 precision resistor
termination per input channel
• Individually fused channels with over voltage input protection

There are two types of analog input termination assemblies:

• A 1715-TASIF16, 16-channel simplex TA that provides termination for 16
single-ended analog input channels and mates with one 1715-IF16
16-channel analog input module. There is no channel isolation.
• A 1715-TADIF16, 16-channel duplex TA that provides termination for 16
isolated analog input channels and mates with up to two 1715-IF16
16-channel analog input modules. The channels are isolated.
Figure 21 - 1715-TASIF16 and 1715-TADIF16 Analog Input Termination Assemblies
1715-TASIF16 1715-TADIF16
Analog Input Simplex Analog Input Duplex
Termination Assembly Termination Assembly

Field Connections This Side

Terminal Block Cable Entry This Side

CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8CH9 CH10CH11CH12CH13CH14CH15

Channel -
CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3

Channel +
CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9

TB1 TB2
CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15
Fuse
Fuse Holder

FS1 FS3 FS5 FS7 FS9 FS11 FS13 FS15

FS2 FS4 FS6 FS8 FS10 FS12 FS14 FS16

Fuse Covers
Fuse Cover
J1 J2 J3 J4

c c c c
16 16 16 16

Coding Pegs

Coding
1 1 1 1
Pegs
32094 AI SIMPLEX TA 32120 M

32120 -M

Fuse Type: Littelfuse No. 396/TE5 50 mA Timelag Fuse; UL 248-14, 125V, T Leadfree for Analog Input
Termination Assemblies. Use a pair of long-nosed pliers for fuse removal and replacement.

See page 90 for detailed wiring instructions.

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Analog Output Termination Assemblies

Analog output termination assemblies support these features:

• Eight output channels for a simplex/duplex configuration
• Industry-standard field device connections at the terminal blocks
• Analog output channels provide 4…20 mA DC for external field devices
• Duplex termination assembly provides increased fault tolerance for
output channels

There are two types of analog output termination assemblies:

• A 1715-TASOF8, 8-channel simplex TA that provides termination for 8
single-ended analog output channels and mates with one 1715-OF8I
8 -channel analog output module
• A 1715-TADOF8, 8-channel duplex termination assembly provides fault
tolerant operation for 8 analog output channels through inter-module
communication and by routing the output source current from two
modules to the same field device

IMPORTANT The dual termination assembly does this by supporting inter-module

communication for current sync operation and by routing the channel
outputs from two 8-channel analog output modules in parallel to 8 field
devices. Therefore, each field device receives a current source from a
channel on each of two modules. So if one module fails, or one or more
channels fail on a module, the outputs from the second module
continues to supply the field devices.
Figure 22 - 1715-TASOF8 and 1715-TAD0F8 Analog Output Termination Assemblies

1715-TASOF8 1715-TADOF8
Analog Output Simplex Analog Output Duplex
Termination Assembly Termination Assembly

LOOP-
DAOTA
PCB130861 REV A
LOOP+

CH TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CH0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

J1 J2 J3 J4

J1 J2

c c

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 45

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

1715-C2 Expansion Cable

A 2 m (6.56 ft) expansion cable is available to connect I/O modules to field

devices, and to allow for space restrictions within the enclosure of the system.

IMPORTANT • 1715-C2 cables must be secured when installed; use the provided screws
to secure the cable.
• 1715-C2 cables are rated 30V/9.6 A.

32086 M

1715-N2T and 1715-N2S Slot Filler Covers

Slot filler covers are available in two sizes to cover empty slots in your system.
Use the tall cover (catalog number 1715-N2T) when no termination assembly is
present. Use the short cover (catalog number 1715-N2S) when a slot has a
termination assembly, but no module.

TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

AOTA
Dual.
Slot Filler Covers

Module Status Module Status

Redundancy Status Redundancy Status
Network Status Network Status
Rack Status Rack Status

Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1
Ethernet 2 Ethernet 2

Reset Reset

32078 M

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Power Requirements

A 24V DC power supplied is required. See Install the Power Supply on page 57
for complete details.

ATTENTION: To comply with the CE and UKCA Low Voltage Directive (LVD), all
connections to this equipment must be powered from a source compliant with
the following:
Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) or Protected Extra Low Voltage (PELV)

ATTENTION: In high demand energise to trip and continuous demand mode of

operation additional protection will need to be in place to inherently limit each
1715-AENTR power supply to a maximun 32 V.

Cooling Requirements

The 1715-AENTR adapter is designed to operate in its specified environment

without forced air cooling. Forced air cooling can be needed in individual
circumstances, such as when the system shares its enclosure with other heat
producing equipment.

Adequate ventilation must be provided for the system and the ambient
temperature in the enclosure must not be higher than the maximum operating
value of 60 °C (140 °F).

The adapter dissipates all power that it uses as heat. This is the power that is
supplied to the terminals on the 1715-A2A adapter base unit. The I/O modules
dissipate some of the power they take from the field power source as heat. The
actual amount of heat depends on the number of channels in use.

IMPORTANT Cooling by Convection: For correct cooling of the equipment, fit the
base units in the vertical plane and orientate so the modules are
upright, with their ventilation slots at the top and bottom.

The 1715-AENTR adapter is open-type equipment that is rated IP20. This

provides protection against solid objects over 12 mm (0.47 in.), but does not
provide protection against liquids.

Heating Requirements

If enclosure is in colder environments, temperatures must be kept at

-20 °C (-4 °F) or higher.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 47

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Specify an Enclosure

An enclosure for the 1715 Redundant I/O system must be designed for the
specific environmental conditions that are present. It must support the weight
of the system, provide mechanical protection, and remove the heat that the
system creates. If the application of the adapter is not using existing power
sources, the power supply units can be placed inside the enclosure.

ATTENTION: The modules contain static-sensitive devices that can be

damaged by incorrect handling. Label the exterior surface of the enclosure to
caution personnel to observe anti-static precautions when handling the
modules.

System Software The firmware on your 1715 Redundant I/O system can be updated with the
following ControlFLASH™ files:
• Adapter ControlFLASH
• Adapter Recovery ControlFLASH
• I/O Module ControlFLASH

The files are available from the Product Compatibility and Download Center
website.

The Adapter module contains two sets of firmware. The normal firmware is
the operational firmware and allows connections from a Logix Controller. The
Recovery firmware is used to update the firmware in the I/O modules and help
diagnose problems. The normal and Recovery firmware are updated with
separate ControlFLASH files.

Before starting check that:

• RSLinx® Gateway has been installed and configured
• The BOOTP server has been configured with the MAC address and
suitable IP address for the 1715-AENTR
• The correct ControlFLASH file for the 1715-AENTR module or I/O module
has been installed
• When you update 1715 I/O module firmware, make sure that the
1715-AENTR Recovery mode firmware from 1715 revision 3.001 or later is
installed and running (Recovery mode firmware revision 1.011 or later)

Dual 1715-AENTR modules are updated at the same time.

Each I/O module is updated separately, even if it is fitted to a dual termination

assembly.

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Update procedure:
• Run the ControlFLASH program
• Select the type of module from the list
• Browse to the 1715-AENTR and open it, open the Backplane, then select
the module to be updated.
• Select the version of firmware to be sent to the module
• Update the module
• The firmware will be downloaded and stored on the module - this will
take between 2 minutes and 25 minutes
• Control FLASH will report the success or failure of the update
• Repeat for other modules that need to be updated

See document 1756-UM105 ControlFLASH firmware Upgrade Kit User Manual

in the Literature Library for detailed instructions for using ControlFLASH

When updating the firmware, it is recommended that RSWho is not actively

browsing the 1715-AENTR or the associated I/O modules.

IMPORTANT The 1715-AENTR modules revision I6 contain base code. Both the normal
and recovery mode firmware must be updated.
1715-AENTR modules newer than revision I6 and all I/O modules contain
the latest firmware at manufacture time. It may be necessary to
change the firmware to be compatible with your system, or to upgrade
to the latest version.

IMPORTANT See the latest certifications for software and firmware at rok.auto/
certifications. See the TÜV website at
http://www.tuvasi.com for SIL 2 certification listings.

IMPORTANT When updating firmware the 1715 Redundant I/O system is off line. It
must be in Recovery mode, or there must be no active connections.

IMPORTANT ControlFLASH can be used to update the firmware in the adapter.

From 1715 revision 3.001 and later, when in Recovery mode,
ControlFLASH can be used to update the firmware in the I/O modules.
(This is available in the Adapter Recovery ControlFLASH version 1.011 and
later.)

IMPORTANT After upgrading a revision 1.005 1715 chassis to revision 2.001 or later,
power to the 1715 chassis must be cycled.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 49

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Module Placement A general overview of a typical redundant I/O system layout is shown here.

12

TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

13
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA

Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual.

Module Status Module Status Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy

Healthy
Redundancy Status Redundancy Status Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready
Ready
Network Status Network Status Run Run Run Run Run
Run
Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00
Rack Status Rack Status Channel 00
Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01
Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02
Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03
Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04
Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05
Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06
Ethernet 2 Ethernet 2 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07

Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08

Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09
Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10
Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11
Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12
Reset Reset
Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13
Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14
Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15
1715-A310

1715-A310
IO BASE

IO BASE
1 4 8
32065 M

2 3 5 6 7 9 10 11

32065-M
This illustration is only an example and is for illustrative purposes only.

Item Description
1 Adapter base unit
2 Adapter A module
3 Adapter B module
4 I/O base unit
5 Simplex I/O module
6 Duplex I/O module - first in pair
7 Duplex I/O module - second in pair
8 I/O base unit
9 Simplex I/O module
10 Duplex I/O module - first in pair
11 Duplex I/O module - second in pair
12 Power connections
13 Ethernet connections

The adapter and base units are DIN rail mounted and connections are chained
together from left to right.

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Base Units

The adapter base unit is always the leftmost base unit in the connection chain.
The total length of the base unit backplane length, including all expansion
cables cannot exceed 10 m (32.81 ft).

A base slot (adapter or I/O) consumes an address whether it is full or empty.

The first adapter in the pair occupies slot 0 and is on the left, the second
adapter occupies slot 1 and is on the right. Only adapters can occupy the slots
of the adapter base.

An adapter base unit can support up to 8 I/O base units (up to 24 I/O modules)
on its right side.

Module positions within the I/O base units are numbered from 2…25, the
leftmost position being slot 2.

The total number of slot positions in the system is 26; adapters occupy slots
0…1 and I/O modules occupy slots 2…25.

Expansion cables can be used to connect base units, as shown here.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 51

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Figure 23 - Example System Layout

TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA

Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual.

Module Status Module Status Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy

Healthy
Redundancy Status Redundancy Status Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready
Ready
Network Status Network Status Run Run Run Run Run
Run
Rack Status Rack Status Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00
Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01
Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02
Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03
Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04
Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05
Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1
Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06
Ethernet 2 Ethernet 2
Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07

Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08

Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09
Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10
Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11
Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12
Reset Reset
Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13
Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14
Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15

1715-A310

1715-A310
IO BASE

IO BASE
TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA

Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual.

Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy

Healthy
Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready
Ready
Run Run Run Run Run Run Run Run
Run
Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00
Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01
Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02
Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03
Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04
Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05
Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06
Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07

Channel 08 Channel 08
Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08
Channel 09 Channel 09
Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09
Channel 10 Channel 10
Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10
Channel 11 Channel 11
Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11
Channel 12 Channel 12
Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12
Channel 13 Channel 13
Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13
Channel 14 Channel 14
Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14
Channel 15 Channel 15
Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15
1715-A310

1715-A310

1715-A310
IO BASE

IO BASE

IO BASE
TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA

Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual.

Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy

Healthy
Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready
Ready
Run Run Run Run Run Run Run Run
Run
Channel 01 Channel 00 Channel 00
Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00
Channel 02 Channel 01 Channel 01
Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01
Channel 03 Channel 02 Channel 02
Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02
Channel 04 Channel 03 Channel 03
Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03
Channel 05 Channel 04 Channel 04
Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04
Channel 06 Channel 05 Channel 05
Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05
Channel07 Channel 06 Channel 06
Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06
Channel 08 Channel 07 Channel 07
Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07

Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08

Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09
Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10
Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11
Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12
Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13
Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14
Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15
1715-A310

1715-A310

1715-A310
IO BASE

IO BASE

IO BASE

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Install Summary The 1715 Redundant I/O system is a modular system. The adapter and I/O base
units snap together by using mating connectors and retaining clips to form the
backplane.

The base units provide the interconnections for power, adapter, and I/O data.
Once connected, the base units form one mechanical assembly, or backplane.

IMPORTANT The insertion and removal of modules does not disturb the electrical
connections with field devices.

Step 1: Enclosure DIN Rail Assembly

The 1715 Redundant I/O system is assembled on DIN rails within an enclosure.

After deciding on an enclosure, install the DIN rails before building your
system.

Step 2: Build the System

After assembling the DIN rail enclosure, follow these steps in this order to
build your redundant I/O system.
1. Mount a 24V, user-supplied, power supply.

See the instructions that came with the power supply.

2. Mount the adapter base unit onto the DIN rails.
3. Mount the I/O base units onto the DIN rails.
4. Insert retaining clips to connect adapter and I/O base units.
5. Install anchor end stops onto the DIN rails.
6. Mount termination assemblies to the base units.
7. Mount I/O expansion cable, if needed.
8. Wire the adapter base:
• Connect to power.
• Wire the ground.
• Connect to field wiring.
9. Connect the adapter to the Ethernet network.
10. Module keying/verify coding peg positions.
11. Install the adapter redundant module pair.
12. Install the I/O modules.
13. Install slot filler covers over unused slots.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 53

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Product Dimensions This section outlines the space requirements for your 1715 Redundant
I/O System.

DIN Rail Mounting Dimensions

The system requires free space of at least 140 mm deep (5.51 in.) from front to
back between the rear panel of an enclosure and the inside of an enclosure
door.

IMPORTANT Allow sufficient free space around the base units. Every installation
needs space on at least three sides, as follows:
• Space above, to manipulate and install field wiring
• Space below, to enable modules to fit and to be able to grasp a module
during removal
• Space to the right, to maneuver an I/O base unit during assembly or in
the event of installing a new base unit

IMPORTANT Minimum clearance between the product and the adjacent equipment
must be 15.3…20 cm (6.0…8.0 in.) between chassis and a heat source,
and allow 5.1 cm (2.0 in.) between wireway and top or bottom of chassis.

DIN rail mounting is shown in the following figure.

46 mm
(1.81 in.)
TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA

Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual.

101 mm Module Status Module Status Healthy Healthy Healthy

Healthy Healthy Healthy

(3.98 in.)
Redundancy Status Redundancy Status Ready Ready Ready

233 mm
Ready Ready Ready
Network Status Network Status Run Run Run
Run Run Run
Rack Status Rack Status Channel 00 Channel 00
Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00

(9.17 in.)
Channel 01 Channel 01
Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01
Channel 02 Channel 02
Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02
Channel 03 Channel 03
Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03
Channel 04 Channel 04
Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04
Channel 05 Channel 05
Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05
Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1 Channel 06
Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06
Ethernet 2 Ethernet 2 Channel 07
Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07

Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08 Channel 08

Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09 Channel 09
Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel 10
Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11 Channel 11
Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel 12
Reset Reset
Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13 Channel 13
Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14
Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15 Channel 15
1715-A310

1715-A310
IO BASE

IO BASE

Each Base Unit (Two Shown) Occupies 126 mm (4.96 in.) Width

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

DIN Rail Assembly The 1715 Redundant I/O system is mounted on DIN rails within an enclosure.
Pay special attention to dimensions needed for base unit placement.

For each pair of DIN rails, mount the lower rail with its center line
101 mm (3.98 in.) below the center line of the upper rail.

Free space must also be provided on each end of the DIN rail for the end stops,
if necessary.

Component Size and Weights

Table 6 - Component Sizes
Item Size (H x W x D)
Adapter base unit 224 x 84 x 30 mm (8.82 x 3.31 x 1.18 in.)
I/O module base unit 233 x 126 x 18 mm (9.25 x 5 x 0.75 in.)
Module 166 x 42 x 118 mm (6.5 x 1.625 x 4.625 in.)

The total depth of a base unit and module is 136 mm (5.375 in.).

Figure 24 - Module Dimensions

All module dimensions are the same, whether they are adapters or I/O
modules.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 55

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Figure 25 - System Dimensions

84 mm
(3.31 in.)

126 mm
(4.96 in.)

233 mm
(9.17 in.)

237 mm
9.33 in.)

237 mm
9.33 in.)

Be sure that the mounting assembly can support the weight of the components
by using this table.

Table 7 - Component Weights

Cat. No. Component Weight g (oz)
1715-A2A Adapter base unit 283 (9.98)(1)
1715-A3IO I/O base unit 220 (7.76)
1715-AENTR Adapter 420 (14.82)
1715-IB16D Digital input module 360 (12.70)
1715-IF16 Analog input module 360 (12,70)
1715-OB8DE Digital output module 290 (10.23)
1715-OF8I Analog output module 340 (11.99)
Digital input simplex termination
1715-TASIB16D 133 (4.69)
assembly
Digital input duplex termination
1715-TADIB16D 260 (9.17)
assembly
Analog input simplex termination
1715-TASIF16 133 (4.69)
assembly

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Table 7 - Component Weights (Continued)

Cat. No. Component Weight g (oz)
Analog input duplex termination
1715-TADIF16 260 (9.17)
assembly
Digital output simplex termination
1715-TASOB8DE 133 (4.69)
assembly
Digital output duplex termination
1715-TADOB8DE 260 (9.17)
assembly
Analog output simplex termination
1715-TASOF8 133 (4.69)
assembly
Analog output duplex termination
1715-TADOF8 260 (9.17)
assembly
1715-N2S Short blank slot filler 40 (1.41)
1715-N2T Tall blank slot filler 50 (1.76)
Power supply User-supplied Varies
(1) All weights are approximate.

Install the Power Supply Power supplies must be installed to the left of the adapter base unit in a
position where the 24V DC supply wiring can be kept reasonably short.
Figure 26 shows an example of a mounted power supply.

ATTENTION: To comply with the CE and UKCA Low Voltage Directive (LVD), all
connections to this equipment must be powered from a source compliant with
the following:
Safety extra low voltage (SELV) or protected extra low voltage (PELV)

ATTENTION: In high demand energize to trip and continuous demand mode of

operation the power supply for the 1715-AENTR should include over voltage
protection and supply a maximum of 32V.
Figure 26 - Power Supply

TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA AOTA

Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual.

Single use
Parallel use

DC 24-28V 100W max.

DC ok

24-28V
1715-A310

1715-A310
IO BASE

IO BASE

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 57

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

The 1715 Redundant I/O system requires 24V DC power with a tolerance
between 18…32V DC. The system has been designed to operate with most
commercially available industrial uninterruptible power supplies (UPS). To
select a suitable power supply, calculate the overall system load that must be
powered by using the following table, include any additional devices and add a
contingency allowance between 25…50%.

Component Power Requirement

Adapter 8.0 W
Digital input module 4.0 W
Analog input module 4.0 W
Digital output module 3.0 W
Analog output module 3.6 W
Power supply Varies

Install the Adapter Base Unit The adapter base unit supports a pair of adapters. The adapter base unit has
connections for two power feeds, four Ethernet ports, and two adapters on the
front of the unit, and one I/O base connector on the right-hand side of the unit.
The connections for the adapters are commonly referred to as adapter slots.

To mount the 1715-A2A adapter base unit, follow these steps.

1. Place the 1715-A2A adapter base unit onto the DIN rails and position
them toward the left, leaving space for the I/O base units to the right.
2. Secure the adapter base unit onto the DIN rails by sliding the retaining
lever (below the base unit) to the left, as far as it goes, until it latches in
the locked position.

Adapter Base Unit

DIN Rails

Retaining Lever

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Install the I/O Base Unit You can install up to three I/O modules on an I/O base unit. The I/O base unit
has an incoming I/O base connector on the left-hand side of the unit, an
outgoing I/O base connector on the right-hand side, and, on the front,
connections for three I/O termination assemblies and three I/O modules. The
locations for each I/O termination assembly and I/O module connectors are
paired, and together represent an I/O module slot.

To mount the 1715-A3IO base unit, follow these steps.

1. Mount each 1715-A3IO base unit onto the DIN rails to the right of the 1715-
A2A adapter base unit.
2. Slide the base unit to the left until the joining connectors are fully mated.

Adapter Base Unit

Retaining Clip

I/O Base Unit

Mating
Connector
DIN Rails
Retaining Lever

Retaining Clip

45247

Retaining Lever

3. Secure the I/O base unit onto the DIN rails by sliding the bottom
retaining lever (below the base unit) as far to the left as it goes until it
latches in the locked position.
4. Insert the retaining clips into the top and the bottom slots to connect the
adapter base unit to the I/O base unit.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 59

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Adapter Base Unit

Retaining Clip

I/O Base Unit

Mating
Connector
DIN Rails
Retaining Lever

Retaining Clip

Retaining Lever

5. Attach anchor end stops to the top of the DIN rails once all base units are
mounted.

Typical Types of End Stops

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Install Termination I/O termination assemblies determine the type of I/O modules that can be
Assembly to I/O Base Unit installed in a particular slot. The I/O termination assemblies provide the
mechanism to connect the field wiring specific to the I/O module type to the
back of one or more installed I/O modules. I/O termination assemblies are
available in single-width and double-width varieties. A single-width I/O
termination assembly connects the field wiring to one I/O module slot for
simplex operation, where a double-width I/O termination assembly connects
the field wiring to two I/O module slots for duplex/redundant operation. I/O
termination assemblies can span I/O base unit boundaries, though the I/O
base units must be connected directly. I/O termination assemblies are keyed so
that only I/O modules appropriate to the termination assembly type can be
installed.

Each redundant I/O subsystem supports a maximum of 24 I/O module slots,

which can be configured with 24 simplex I/O termination assemblies, 12
duplex I/O termination assemblies, or any combination in between.

Once the base units and termination assemblies have been installed, the
insertion and removal of modules does not disturb other electrical
connections.

Mount Termination Assemblies

Termination assemblies connect to I/O base units. A combination of duplex

and simplex Termination Assemblies may be mounted. A duplex Termination
Assembly may be mounted across two I/O base units. The combination that is
used depends on the specific configuration requirements of the system.

To connect termination assemblies to I/O base units, follow these steps.

1. Insert the termination assembly (TA) retaining clip on the back of the
termination assembly into the slot on the I/O base unit.
2. Press in and slide the assembly upward as far as it goes until it locks in
place.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 61

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

32061 M

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

3. Make sure the retaining tab clips over the circuit board to secure the TA
in position.

32061 M

Mount I/O Expansion Cable The expansion cable assembly connects an I/O base unit to another I/O base
unit or to the adapter base unit. You can add extra I/O at another location, such
as on another DIN rail. The cable is 2 m long and provides connection for up to
24 I/O modules. The maximum length of an entire bus, or backplane, (the
combination of I/O base units and expansion cables) is 10 m.

The assembly consists of a cable, terminated by multi-way plugs, and a pair of

adapters.

The expansion cable offers these features:

• Two-meter cable length
• Secure with retaining screws and screw cap screws
• Connects all command and response signals and system power
• Screened to reduce emissions

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 63

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Cable Assembly

The cable assembly consists of an SCSI-3 cable and two ferrites. The ferrites are
snap-on components that reduce resonance emissions.

Fit the ferrites 50 mm (1.97 in.) from each end and secure with cable ties either
side of the ferrites.

32080 M

Table 8 - Cable Assembly

Item Description
1 SCSI-3 cable
2 Ferrite
3 Cable-tie

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Expansion Cable

The expansion cable has a left cable adapter and a right cable adapter. Connect
one end to the right-hand bus connector of an I/O base (or adapter base) unit.
The other end connects to the left-hand bus connector of an I/O base unit.

Figure 27 - I/O Expansion Cable Adapters

3
2
4

5
1

Item Description
1 Cable socket assembly
2 SCS1-3 cable
3 Ferrite
4 Cable adapter
5 Cable plug assembly

Expansion cables are available in 2 m (78.74 in.) lengths.

Terminators are not required at the end of the bus (last base unit).

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 65

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Install Expansion Cable

To install an expansion cable, follow these steps.

Table 9 - Expansion Cable Components

Item Description
1 M3 socket cap screw
2 Cable plug assembly
3 Cable socket assembly
4 M3 nut

IMPORTANT Adapter base units can only be extended from the right side.

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Connect to a 1715-A3IO 3-slot I/O Base Unit

1. To extend from the right-hand side of an I/O base unit, insert a cable
plug assembly into the I/O backplane connector.

2. When installing the cable on the left side of the base unit, insert a cable
socket assembly into the I/O backplane connector.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 67

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

3. Insert an M3 nut into the base unit molding assembly as shown.

4. Secure the plug or socket assembly by inserting the two M3 socket cap
screws.
5. Tighten the screws with a 2.5 mm hex key.
6. Install the cable end into the plug or socket assembly and tighten the
retaining screws by hand.
7. Fit the cable plug or socket assembly to the other I/O base unit and secure
as in steps 3 and 4.
8. Fit the other end of the cable into the cable plug or socket assembly.

68 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Connect to a 1715-A2A 2-slot Adapter Base Unit

1. When installing the expansion cable from the right-hand side, insert a
cable plug assembly into the 1715-A2A adapter base unit connector.

Extending from right-hand side

Cable Plug Assembly M3 Socket Cap Screw

2
3
1
2
4 3
1

4 3
2 M3 Socket Cap Screw

M3 Nut

2. Follow steps 3, 4, and 5.

3. Insert the cable end into the cable plug assembly and tighten the
retaining screws by hand.
4. Fit the cable socket assembly to the I/O base unit and secure as in steps 4
and 5.
5. Fit the other end of the cable into the cable socket assembly.

Connect cable plug assembly to

the adapter base connector.

Adapter Base Connector

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 69

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Wire the Adapter The 1715 adapter base unit has a series of screw terminal blocks to terminate
power connections to ease cable installation.

Connect the 24V DC System Power

The 1715 modules are designed to operate from two independent 24V DC
sources with a common return. Power is connected to the two plugs, ‘PWR-1’
and ‘PWR-2’ on the adapter base plate. Power is distributed to the I/O modules
through the base units.

Figure 28 - Connect System Power

C C
o o
m m
m m
o +24V DC o +24V DC
n n

Pwr1 Pwr2

ATTENTION: To comply with the CE and UKCA Low Voltage Directive (LVD), all
connections to this equipment must be powered from a source compliant with
safety extra low voltage (SELV) or protected extra low voltage (PELV).

ATTENTION: To comply with UL restrictions, all connections to this equipment

must be powered from a UL Listed source compliant with Limited Voltage/
Current per UL 508.

For each power supply connection, follow these steps.

1. Connect the negative line from the power supply, typically labeled ‘OV’, to
the left-hand terminal.
2. Connect the positive line from the power supply, typically labeled ‘+24V’,
to the right-hand terminal.
3. Apply a minimum tightening torque of 0.5 N•m (0.37 lb•ft) to the
terminal screws.
Table 10 - - Module Power Wiring Sizes
Wiring Attribute Size
Conductor cross section, stranded maximum 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG)
Conductor cross section, solid maximum 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG)
Stripping length 7 mm (9/32 in.)

70 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

For maximum protection, be sure that the PWR-1 and PWR-2 plugs are
supplied from independent 24V DC sources as in Figure 29. Only having one
power supply plug connection causes a Rack Status fault status indicator to
illuminate on adapters.

Figure 29 - Independent Power Sources

MP-PWR-24V1 OV
OV MP-PWR-24V2
PWR 1 PWR 2

Wire the Ground Connection

The system can have up to three separate ground systems:

• An AC Safety Ground (sometimes called the ‘dirty ground’) to help
protect you in the event of a fault. The ground stud on the adapter base
unit must be connected to the AC safety ground, along with all exposed
metalwork, such as DIN rails.
• An Instrument Ground (sometimes called the ‘clean ground’ or ‘OV DC
ground’) to provide a good stable OV reverence for the system. Every
signal return must be referenced to the instrument ground, which is
isolated from the AC Safety Ground.
• Some field wiring needs shielded (screened) cable. There can be a Shield
Ground and the AC Safety and Instrument Grounds to provide a
common point to terminate cable shields.

Connect the adapter base unit ground stud to the AC safety ground busbar of
the system:
• Use an M6 lug on the end of the ground wire.
• Place the lug below the second nut on the ground stud between two
washers and use two 10 mm (.039 in.) wrenches to tighten the nuts.
• Use a minimum conductor wire size of 4 mm2 (10 AWG).

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 71

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Figure 30 - Adapter Base Unit Ground Connection Detail

AC Ground Connection Only

MP-PWR-24V1 OV
OV MP-PWR-24V2

Connect Field Wiring Connect the field wiring to the screw terminal blocks on the termination
assemblies.

IMPORTANT The termination assemblies have integral fuses.

IMPORTANT You must use safety wiring principles if the applicable standards for the
system require you take precautions to avoid external short circuits,
because the internal diagnostics in the 1715 adapter do not detect
external short circuits between channels. These standards include
NFPA-72.

ATTENTION: To comply with the CE and UKCA Low Voltage Directive (LVD), all
connections to this equipment must be powered from a source compliant with
safety extra low voltage (SELV) or protected extra low voltage (PELV).

ATTENTION: To comply with UL restrictions, all connections to this equipment

must be powered from a UL. Listed source compliant with Limited Voltage/
Current per UL 508.

72 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Recommended Circuits for Digital Inputs

These circuits can be used for simplex and duplex configurations of digital
input modules. Fit a fuse in each circuit to help protect the field wiring.

Figure 31 - Standard Input

DC

5.11

Figure 32 - Line Monitored Inputs

DC

5.11

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 73

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Threshold Settings for Line Monitored Field Devices

For information about setting threshold values, see Threshold Values for
Digital Inputs on page 211.

We recommend that you do a manual calibration drift check every two years.
See Calibration Drift Checks on page 221.

1715-IB16D Digital Input Module Functional Block Diagram

Figure 33 - 1715-IB16D 16-channel Module Functional Block Diagram

Typical Circuit
Termination
Field
Assembly
Inputs
Dual Input PWR
Channel 0 Measurement Isolator CMD
SPI
Device RES
Flash
PWR
Channel 1 CMD
RES
PWR
Channel 2 CMD I/O Command Bus
RES
PWR Response Bus
CMD
Channel 3 PMA Commands
RES PWR
PMB Commands
PWR
PM Commands
Channel 4 CMD CMD
RES Input Data
PWR Data Management
Input Data I/O Backplane
Channel 5 CMD FPGA
RES
PWR Module Status Front Panel
CMD LEDS
Channel 6 Channel Status
RES

Dual Input PWR

Measurement CMD PWR Power
Channel 7 Isolator
Valid
Device RES

SYS_24V1
Dual
SYS_24V2 Isolated Over/Under PWR
Redundant
System Power Voltage
SYS_OV Supply Power
Power Protection
Valid

Figure 33 provides a Function Block Diagram of the 1715 digital input module
illustrating the input circuits, isolation circuits, internal power supplies, and
the input data management by the FPGA. Each input signal is routed through a
termination assembly to two input measurement devices. These devices
determine the input status and channel condition and generate the input data
for the ControlLogix controller.

The digital input module receives commands from the adapter and converts
the channel input data into secure digital data packets. Signal power and
isolation circuits separate out each input channel from the rest of the system
and protect the system components from field faults.

The internal isolated power supply from the 24V DC dual redundant system
power inputs produces module power. The isolated power supply provides
power to the module and is protected by overvoltage and undervoltage
detection circuits. Supply voltage monitoring initiates a warning signal and
Power-off protective mode when a power failure is detected.

Internal diagnostics test the module every application cycle to see whether
values are within the 1%-value fault band, and if appropriate, report a fault.

74 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

An independent watchdog arrangement also monitors the module operation

and provides more fault containment by activating a shutdown mechanism if a
fault is detected. For SIL 2 systems the time to active the shutdown mechanism
can be configured in the CRTL on the SIL 2 Safety tab in them module profile
in RSLogix/Logix Designer. For non-SIL 2 systems it is set at 10 seconds.

IMPORTANT If a fault occurs during normal operation in a duplex-configured

system, an input module can be removed and replaced without
disrupting the flow of input data.

The adapter also monitors the input data paths and can detect faults within
each input channel. A visual indication of the module status and individual
channel status is provided by an array of front panel indicators.

The range of termination assemblies can accept one or two input modules.
Each assembly provides passive signal load termination and fuse overvoltage
protection on each input channel. The system provides flexible and scalable
input connectivity through mating termination assemblies with the relevant
number of input modules.

Field Wiring of Digital Input Termination Assemblies

The termination assembly routes each digital input through a circuit. See
Figure 34. The input channel is protected with a 50 mA fuse. When an extreme
overvoltage is applied to the input, the fuse blows. Each digital input signal is
terminated by 5.11 khigh reliability load and is fed to the input circuit of the
input module.

Figure 34 - 1715-TASIB16D Digital Input Termination Assembly Input Circuit

+ve

4K99

F1 50 mA Time Lag
24V Digital Fuse
Field Input
Channel 2.5V Range
Power & Signal
Isolator
100

500 mV Range

20

OV Common
-ve
J1/J2

1715-TASIB16D- Termination Assembly 1715-IB16D Digital Input Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 75

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Figure 35 - 1715-TASIB16D and 1715-TADIB16D Digital Input Termination Assemblies

1715-TASIB16D Digital Input 1715-TADIB16D Digital Input
Simplex Termination Duplex Termination Assembly
Assembly

Terminal Block Cable Entry This Side Field Connections This Side

CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8CH9 CH10CH11CH12CH13CH14CH15

0V 0V CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Channel -

CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 Channel +

CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16 TB1 TB2

Fuse
Fuse Holder
TERMINAL IDENTITY

FS1 FS2 FS3 FS4 FS5 FS6 FS7 FS8 FS1 FS3 FS5 FS7 FS9 FS11 FS13 FS15

FS9 FS10 FS11 FS12 FS13 FS14 FS15 FS16 FS2 FS4 FS6 FS8 FS10 FS12 FS14 FS16

Fuse
Fuse Cover
J1 J2 J1 J2 J3 J4

c c c c c c
16 16 16 16 16 16

Coding Pegs

1 1 1 1 1 1
Coding Pegs
32095 32120 M
32095-M

Figure 36 - Connections to 1715-TASIB16D Simplex Nonisolated Digital Input

16-channel Termination Assembly

OV OV CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3

CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9

CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15

76 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Apply a minimum tightening torque of 0.5 N•m (0.37 lb•ft) to the terminal
screws.

Figure 37 - Connections to 1715-TADIB16D Duplex Digital Input 16-channel Termination Assembly

CH0 - CH1 - CH2- CH3- CH4- CH5- CH6- CH7- CH8- CH9- CH10-CH11-CH12-CH13-CH14- CH15-

CH0+CH1+CH2+ CH3+CH4+CH5+CH6+CH7+ CH8+CH9+CH10+

CH11+CH12+CH13+CH14+CH15+

TB1 TB2

Apply a minimum tightening torque of 0.5 N•m (0.37 lb•ft) to the terminal
screws.

Digital Input Slew Tolerance

It is possible during sustained periods of abnormal input voltage slewing that

channels can be declared faulted as a consequence of diagnostics that are
otherwise designed to verify that the channels are operating within their
designed safety accuracy.

To avoid spurious declaration of channel faults, it is necessary to make sure

that the input signal condition satisfies the maximum slew rate criteria that
are defined in the 1715 Redundant I/O System Specifications Technical Data,
publication 1715-TD001. So it can be necessary to condition the input signal
with low-pass filtering.

Field Loop Circuits for Digital Inputs

The recommended digital input field loop circuits for the 1715-IB16D digital
input module are shown on page 73.

For line monitored digital input loop circuit wiring and recommended
threshold values, see Appendix B.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 77

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Recommended Circuits for Digital Outputs

This circuit is suitable for simplex and duplex configurations of digital output
modules. The two 10 A fuses that are shown are supplied with the adapter in
the output termination assembly. They help protect all output circuits that are
associated with the particular termination assembly.

ATTENTION: For inductive loads, connect a diode at the actuator to protect

the adapter against back EMF.

78 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

1715-OB8DE Digital Output Module FBD

Figure 38 - 1715-OB8DE Functional Bock Diagram (FBD)
Combined Power Feed
VFIELD 1
24V Power PWR Feed Combiner Drives
FIELD VFIELD 2 Combiner
POWER
VFIELD
SPI
OV RTN
Flash

Response Bus
Response Response IMON A
Data Management
Isolated
& Output Switch IMON B
Backplane
Control A
Interface VREF
Command A,B,C Command Output Control

I/0 Command Bus

I/0 Backplane
PWR Power
PWR Power Valid
Valid

Command Output Control

Data Management
& Output Switch VMON A
Control B
Response
Reverse Voltage
Blocking

Channel Module
Status Status Transient
VMON B Suppression
SYS_24V1
Dual Isolated VREF
Over/Under PWR
RedundantSYS_24V2 Power Voltage
System SYS_OV Power LED Array Termination
Supply Protection
Power Valid Assembly
Front Panel
Termination CH0 CH7
Assembly

See Figure 38. Two independent output switch control units control the field
output channel. The field output circuitry is galvanically isolated from the
processor input commands and response lines by an isolated interface circuit.
This architecture helps protect the system processors from faults in the output
control circuits of the module and possible field device faults.

The internal isolated power supply produces module power, which the dual
redundant system power inputs supply. Over- and undervoltage protection is
applied to the module internal power supply outputs.

Command packets are received from the processor module via the EtherNet/IP
network. The output switch control units decode and vote the output data that
is addressed to them and set the output FET switches accordingly. The output
voltages are produced from the 24V DC field power input voltages by a power
combiner circuit. Each output channel has a pair of FET switches arranged in a
series that are independently controlled. Load current and voltage monitoring
is provided for each switch. Output channel protection makes sure that the
output circuit is switched off when the channel load current exceeds a safe
limit.

A reverse voltage protection circuit makes sure that externally applied voltages
to any output channel do not generate current flow backwards into the module
outputs.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 79

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

In Duplex redundant mode, the two fail-safe output switches per channel are
combined in a parallel arrangement so that they automatically form a fault-
tolerant output configuration. In this configuration, removal and of an output
module is possible without any disruption to a live system.

The module has a range of self-checking functionality. Short circuit and open
circuit line monitoring is provided on all outputs. In addition, each output
channel is tested and checked for ‘stuck-on’ and ‘stuck-off’ conditions on the
output switch pairs. The 'stuck-on'/'stuck-off' test is performed on one 1715-
OB8DE module per minute.

Field Wiring of Digital Output Termination Assemblies

The 1715-TASOB8DE and 1715-TADOB8DE consist of a simple PCB, screw

termination blocks (16 terminals), two 10 A fuses with a plastic fuse cover,
coding pegs, field terminal connectors and connectors to connect the module
to the command, and response buses.

Figure 39 - 1715-TASOB8DE and 1715-TADOB8DE Digital Output Termination Assemblies

1715-TAD0B8DE
1715-TASOB8DE
Digital Output Duplex
Digital Output Simplex
Termination Assembly
Termination Assembly
Field Connections This Side
Field Connections This Side

Ov V1+ Ov V2+ Ov V1+ Ov V2+ Ov V1+ Ov V2+ Ov V1+ Ov V2+

CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7

CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7
TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4
TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4

10 A Fuse
TEST

FH1 FH2
FH1 FH2

10 A Fuse
J1

J1 J2

c c
Coding Pegs

Coding
Pegs

80 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Figure 40 - Connections to 1715-TASOB8DE and 1715-TADOB8DE Digital Output Termination Assembly 8-

channel Simplex/Duplex
V2 +
V1 +
V1 + To
OV OV OV
Next
OV
TA
V2 + (if fitted)

TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4

CH0 CH2 CH4 CH6

32105 M DO TA Field Wiring
CH1 CH3 CH5 CH7

Apply a minimum tightening torque of 0.5 N•m (0.37 lb•ft) to the terminal
screws.

The 24V DC field voltages VFIELD 1 and VFIELD 2, used by the output module
for the output field voltages, are connected at the terminal blocks and fed via
two replaceable 10 A fuses, F1 and F2. These fuses give protection for the output
module against field faults. Field OV (VFIELD RTN) is also routed from the
output module connectors to the terminal block.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 81

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Figure 41 - 1715-TASOB8DE Digital Output Simplex Termination Assembly Connections

F1
VFIELD1+24V DC

F2
VFIELD2+24V DC

Digital Output Module

Fail Safe Channel
Array

DO CH0
DO CH1
DO CH2
DO CH3
DO CH4
DO CH5
VFIELD RTN OV DO CH6
DO CH7

32103 M DO Simplex
Output Connections

Figure 42 - 1715-TADOB8DE Digital Output Duplex Termination Assembly Connections

Fuse F1
VFIELD1
+24V DC
Fuse F2
VFIELD2
+24V DC

Connector J1 Connector J2

Digital Output Digital Output

Fail Safe Channel Fail Safe Channel
Array Array
DO Module DO Module

DO CH0
DO CH1
DO CH2
DO CH3
DO CH4
DO CH5
VFIELD RTN
DO CH6
OV
DO CH7

33004 M DO Duplex
Output Connections

82 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Figure 43 - Digital Output Termination Assembly Field Wiring

V2 +
V1 +
V1 + To
OV OV OV
Next
OV
TA
V2 + (if fitted)

TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4

CH0 CH2 CH4 CH6

32105 M DO TA Field Wiring
CH1 CH3 CH5 CH7

Digital Output Slew Tolerance

It is possible during sustained periods of abnormal field supply or output

signal condition slewing that channels can be declared faulted. The fault is a
result of diagnostics that verify that the channels are operating within their
designed safety accuracy.

To avoid spurious declaration of channel faults, it is necessary to make sure

that the field supply voltage and output signal condition satisfy the maximum
slew rate criteria that are defined in the 1715 Redundant I/O System
Specifications Technical Data, publication 1715-TD001.

Field Loop Circuits for Digital Outputs

The field loop circuit for a digital output is shown in Figure 44.

IMPORTANT The field power 5 A fuses comply with UL508 requirements. The 5 A
fuses are No. 396/TE5 5 A time lag fuse; UL 248-14, 125V,T Leadfree;
manufactured by Littelfuse.
• You can use Class 2 power supplies for the +24V DC field voltage instead
of the two 5 A fuses. The NEC defines Class 2 as providing less than 100
watts (at 24V).
• When digital output modules are configured as a redundant pair, the
minimum load current that is required for channels with line monitoring
is 20 mA.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 83

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Figure 44 - Digital Output (Simplex or Duplex) Field Loop Circuit

DC

DC

IMPORTANT: For inductive loads, a back EMF protection

diode is fitted at the load.

84 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Recommended Circuits for Analog Inputs

This section describes the layout for analog inputs.

1715-TASIF16 Analog Input Termination Assembly Functional Block Diagram

Figure 45 is the diagram for the analog input termination assembly.

Figure 45 - 1715-Analog Input Termination Assembly Functional Block

Termination
Field
Assembly
Inputs
Dual Input PWR
CMD
Channel 0
Typical Circuit
Measurement Isolator SPI
Device RES
Flash
PWR
Channel 1 CMD
RES
PWR
Channel 2 CMD I/O Command Bus
RES
PWR Response Bus
CMD
Channel 3 PMA Commands
RES PWR
PMB Commands
PWR
PM Commands
Channel 4 CMD CMD
RES Input Data
PWR Data Management
Input Data I/O Backplane
Channel 5 CMD FPGA
RES
PWR Module Status Front Panel
CMD LEDS
Channel 6 Channel Status
RES

Dual Input PWR

Measurement CMD PWR Power
Channel 7 Isolator
Valid
Device RES

SYS_24V1
Dual
Isolated Over/Under PWR
Redundant SYS_24V2
System Power Voltage
SYS_OV Supply Power
Power Protection
Valid

32106 M Function Block Diagram

Each input signal is routed through the termination assembly to two input
measurement devices. These devices determine the input status and channel
condition and generate the input data for the controller.

Signal and power isolation circuits separate each input channel from the rest
of the system, thus protecting the system components from field faults.

The internal isolated power supply from the 24V DC dual redundant system
power inputs produces module power. The isolated power supply provides
power to the module and is protected by overvoltage and undervoltage
detection circuits. Supply voltage monitoring initiates a warning signal and
Power-off protective mode when a power failure is detected.

Internal diagnostics, which the adapter controls, test the module at routine
intervals of 50…100 ms. An independent watchdog arrangement also monitors
the module operation and provides more fault containment by activating a
shutdown mechanism when a fault is detected.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 85

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

IMPORTANT If a fault occurs during normal operation in a duplex configured system,

a faulted input module can be removed and replaced without disrupting
the input signals to a live system.
Use extreme caution when removing and inserting I/O modules under
power because bending or damaging the pins can fault the system.

The module also monitors the input data paths and can detect faults within
each input channel. A visual indication of the module status and individual
channel status is provided by an array of front panel indicators and can be
connected to tags within the Studio 5000 Logix Designer® application.

The termination assemblies can accept one or two input modules. Each
termination assembly provides passive signal load termination and
overvoltage protection for each input channel. The system provides flexible
input connectivity by mating specific termination assemblies with the relevant
number of input modules.

Field Loop Circuits for Analog Inputs

These circuits can be used for simplex and duplex configurations of analog
input modules. Fit a suitably rated fuse,“F1” in each circuit to help protect the
field wiring, terminal block, and 4…20mA current generator.

This field loop connection method is used for two-wire field devices.

Figure 46 - Two-wire Analog Input Field Loop Circuit

2-Wire Analog Input

F1 +24V DC

Termination
4…20 mA Assembly

50 mA
Shield
Required
120Ω
Terminal
Blocks

OV

This field loop connection is used for three-wire analog field devices. Fit a
suitably rated fuse, “F2” in each circuit to help protect the field wiring, terminal
block, and 4…20 mA current generator.

86 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Figure 47 - Three-wire Analog Input

3-Wire Analog Input

+24V DC
F2

Termination
4…20 mA Assembly

50 mA
Shield
Required
120 Ω
Terminal
Blocks

OV

This field loop connection method is used for four-wire analog field devices.
Fit a suitably rated fuse, “F3” in each circuit to help protect the field wiring,
terminal block, and 4 mA current generator.

Figure 48 - Four-wire Analog Input

4-Wire Analog Input

F3 +V

Termination
-V Assembly

4…20 mA 50 mA

Shield 120 Ω
Required

Terminal
Blocks

OV

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 87

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Field Wiring of Analog Input Termination Assemblies

The termination assembly routes each analog input through a circuit similar to
that shown in Figure 49. The input channel is protected with a 50 mA fuse.
When an extreme over voltage is applied to the input, the fuse blows. Each
analog input channel is terminated using a pair of high accuracy resistors
presenting a combined termination resistance of 120 Ω. The input module
monitors the channel current by measuring the voltage drop across each
resistor. The fuses have a plastic fuse cover that must be kept in the closed
position during normal operation. Standard field wiring connections are
made at the terminal blocks on the termination assembly.

With a simplex termination assembly, the input signals are routed to one input
module. In duplex configurations, they are routed in parallel to two modules.

IMPORTANT These resistors must be considered as part of the field loop circuit.
Each channel has a 50 mA fuse to help prevent component damage in
overcurrent situations.
Figure 49 - Analog Input Termination Assembly Input Circuit

Termination Assembly Analog Input Module

+ve
F1 50 mA
2.5V
Ch. 0…15 Input
100R Circuit
500mV

20R
0V
-ve

Input
Circuit

When an analog input module is configured as dual, the analog field loop that
is connected to channel 0 is automatically fed to both modules. The system
automatically votes the data from the input modules so that you have only one
value that is presented to the application. The application program is
presented with channel 0 and channel 1 values in a fault tolerant manner so
that if either input module is lost, both values are still available to the
application program.

88 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Figure 50 - 1715-TASIF16 and 1715-TADIF16 Analog Input Termination Assemblies

1715-TASIF16 1715-TADIF16
Analog Input Simplex Analog Input Duplex
Termination Assembly Termination Assembly
Field Connections This Side
Terminal Block Cable This Side
CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8CH9 CH10CH11CH12CH13CH14CH15

Channel -
OV OV CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3

Channel +
CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9

TB1 TB2
CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15
Fuse
TB1 TB2 Fuse Holder
F1 FH1
FH6
FH2

FH4
FH5

FH7
FH8 FH16
FH3
FH1

FS1 FS3 FS5 FS7 FS9 FS11 FS13 FS15

FH10

FH13
FH11
FH12

FH14
FH15
FH9

FS2 FS4 FS6 FS8 FS10 FS12 FS14 FS16

Fuse Covers

J1 J2
Fuse Cover J1 J2 J3 J4

c c c c
16 16 16 16
16 16
Coding Pegs

1 1 1 1
1 1
Coding
Pegs

32120 M

Analog Input Slew Tolerance

It is possible during sustained periods of abnormal input current slewing that

channels can be declared faulted. The fault is a result of diagnostics that are
designed to verify that the channels are operating within their designed safety
accuracy.

To avoid spurious declaration of channel faults, it is necessary to make sure

that the input signal condition satisfies the maximum slew rate criteria that
are defined in the 1715 Redundant I/O System Specifications Technical Data,
publication 1715-TD001. So it can be necessary to condition the input signal
with low-pass filtering or sensor slew rate configuration.

Analog Input Module Field Devices

If there are two field devices, you normally connect them to two channels of a
fault tolerant pair of modules, for example to channel 0 and to channel 1.

The two input values (0 and 1) then must be voted by using logic or a function
block in the application program. This is accomplished by taking either the
lowest or highest value, depending on the application. The other option is to
use the two values in two simplex input modules, for example, both using
channel 0. In this case, the values must still be voted in the application
program in the same way as previously stated, but the system has less fault
tolerance, as the loss of one module removes one of the inputs.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 89

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Figure 51 - Connections to 1715-TASIF16 Simplex Nonisolated Analog Input Termination Assembly-16-

channel
OV OV CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3

CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9

CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15

Apply a minimum tightening torque of 0.5 N•m (0.37 lb•ft) to the terminal
screws.

Figure 52 - Connections to 1715-TADIF16 Duplex Isolated Analog Input Termination Assembly

CH0 - CH1 - CH2- CH3- CH4- CH5- CH6- CH7- CH8- CH9- CH10-CH11-CH12-CH13-CH14- CH15-

CH0+CH1+CH2+ CH3+CH4+CH5+CH6+CH7+ CH8+CH9+CH10+

CH11+CH12+CH13+CH14+CH15+

TB1 TB2

Apply a minimum tightening torque of 0.5 N•m (0.37 lb•ft) to the terminal
screws.

HART Secondary Master

The HART Secondary Master is a handheld monitor/controller that field

engineers use to check and reconfigure the settings of field equipment. For
Allen-Bradley modules to interface and operate with this equipment, an
additional 120 Ω resistor assembly is required in the connecting circuit.

IMPORTANT It is the responsibility of the Installation Engineer to make sure that the
HART secondary Master is correctly installed. information regarding
HART equipment may be obtained from the HART website.
http://en.hartcomm.org/
http://en.hartcomm.org/hcp/tech/aboutprotocol/
aboutprotocol_how.html

90 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Figure 53 - Connections for 120 Ω Resistor and Secondary Master

2-Wire Analog Input

HART +24V DC
Secondary Master

Termination
4…20 mA Assembly
120 Ω

50 mA
Shield
Required
120Ω
Terminal
Blocks

OV

Figure 53 shows the addition of the 120 Ω resistor and HART Secondary
Master to the Two-wire Analog Input Field Loop Circuit shown in Figure 46.
The circuit can be accomplished by connecting the secondary Master and 120
Ω resistor assembly to the 0 V terminal and required channel terminal on the
terminal block as shown in Figure 54 below.

Figure 54 - Connection of 120 Ω Assemblies and Secondary Masters to Terminal Blocks

1715-TASIF16 1715-TADIF16 HART

Analog Input Simplex 0V Analog Input Duplex Secondary Master
Termination Assembly HART Termination Assembly
Secondary Master Field Connections This Side
Terminal Block Cable This Side 120 Ω
120 Ω
CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8CH9 CH10CH11CH12CH13CH14CH15

Channel -
OV OV CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3

CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 Channel +

TB1 TB2
CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15
Fuse
TB1 TB2 Fuse Holder
F1 FH1
FH6
FH2

FH4
FH5

FH7
FH8 FH16
FH3
FH1

FS1 FS3 FS5 FS7 FS9 FS11 FS13 FS15

FH10

FH13
FH11
FH12

FH14
FH15
FH9

FS2 FS4 FS6 FS8 FS10 FS12 FS14 FS16

Fuse Covers
Fuse Cover J1 J2 J3 J4
J1 J2
c c c c
16 16 16 16
16 16
Coding Peg

1 1 1 1
Coding
1 1
45238 32120 M
Pegs

32120 M

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 91

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

The left circuit of Figure 54 represents the secondary master that is connected
to the Channel 2 terminal of a simplex termination assembly.

The right circuit of Figure 54 represents the secondary master that is

connected to the Channel 9 terminals of a duplex termination assembly.

For both circuits, the secondary master is powered through a field power
supply unit.

92 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Recommended Wiring for Analog Output Modules

This section describes the wiring for analog outputs.

Field Wiring of Analog Output Termination Assemblies

Figure 55 - 1715-TASOF8 and 1715-TADOF8 Analog Output Termination Assemblies
1715-TASOF8 1715-TADOF8
Analog Output Simplex Analog Output Duplex
Termination Assembly Termination Assembly

Field Connections This Side Field Connections This Side

LOOP-
DAOTA
PCB130861 REV A
LOOP+

CH0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4

CH 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Fuse Cover Fuse Covers

J1 J2
J1 J2 J3 J4
c c

Coding Pegs Coding Pegs

Analog Output Slew Tolerance

Analog output channel voltage slew is unconstrained with the limits set by the
compliance operating voltage range of the module.

Field Loop Circuit for Analog Outputs

The field loop circuit for an analog output is shown in Figure 56.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 93

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Figure 56 - 1715-OF8I Analog Output Module Recommended Field Loop Circuit Field Power Circuit
System
+24V DC

CH+

CH-
Analog Output
Module
Load
Termination
Assembly

OV
32109-M

Field Power Circuit for Analog Outputs

An alternative method is shown in Figure 57. The figure shows when the field
power is used to supply the load.

Figure 57 - Field Power Circuit for Analog Outputs

Field
+24V DC

CH+

Load
CH-
Analog Output
Module
Termination
Assembly

OV

94 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Connect the Adapter to the The adapter supports Device Level Ring (DLR) and star topologies. For more
Ethernet Network details on topologies, see System Architecture on page 13.

IMPORTANT For wiring details, see Table 11.

The adapter has four autosensing 10/100BASE-TX Ethernet ports for

connecting to a local area network through a minimum Cat5e shielded
twisted-pair (STP) Ethernet cable. There are two ports for each adapter.

IMPORTANT The 1715 Redundant I/O system requires the use of a minimum Cat5e
shielded twisted-pair (STP) Ethernet cable.

The adapter Ethernet ports are on the 1715-A2A adapter base unit and are
identified in this table.

Table 11 - Allocation of 10/100BASE-TX Ports to Adapters

1715-AENTR Adapter 10/100BASE-TX Ports
Adapter A A1, A2
Adapter B (where present) B1, B2

IMPORTANT Most network connections use straight-through cables. Crossover

cables are not needed due to the intelligence or functionality of the
switch. If a direct connection is required from the adapter to the
personal computer (for example, during setup), it can be necessary to
use a crossover cable. This depends on the characteristics of the
interface in the personal computer.

The fixed connectors on the adapter are female RJ45 modular jacks. Use a
minimum Cat5e shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable with male RJ45 modular
jacks for network cabling.

Connect the network cables to the sockets on the 1715-A2A adapter base unit.

To connect the adapter to the Ethernet network, follow these steps.

1. Insert the RJ45 modular jack on the cable into the appropriate socket for
each network connection.
2. Make sure that the length of the cable does not exceed 100 m (328 ft).

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 95

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Module Keying Module keying, or polarization, helps prevent the wrong module from being
inserted into the wrong base unit. Modules are supplied with coding pegs that
are already fitted, so the modules are already ‘keyed’.

Electronic Keying is used within the Logix Designer application. See

Electronic Keying on page 99 for more information.

Figure 58 - Module Coding Peg Sockets and Positions

Coding Peg Socket Coding Peg Positions

The legend for the coding pegs showing the peg positions is shown on the
lower left of the adapter base unit and on each I/O termination assembly. The
positions are numbered 1…6. The three coding pegs are lettered A, B, and C
with A being on the top. Each peg, or key, is fitted in the base unit so that the
index recess is next to the relevant numbered position. See Figure 59, which
shows a photograph of the Adapter Base Unit. Coding peg A is absent.

Table 12 - Allocations of Coding Pegs

Application Key A Key B Key C
1715 Adapter Base Unit Not Available 2 1
1715 Digital Input Termination Assemblies 2 1 1
1715 Analog Input Termination Assemblies (for analog input modules) 2 1 3
1715 Digital Output Termination Assemblies (for digital output modules) 3 1 1

96 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Figure 59 - Inserted Coding Pegs for Adapter Base Unit

Verify Coding Pegs

To verify that each coding peg, also known as a polarizing pin, is positioned
correctly, follow these steps.
1. Review the diagram on the adapter base unit that shows the six possible
positions for a coding peg.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 97

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

2. Examine a coding peg (fitted) and identify the index recess on the
hexagonal flange.

Coding Peg

3. See Table 12 and verify that each coding peg is fitted so its index recess is
next to the relevant numbered position.

98 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Electronic Keying Electronic Keying reduces the possibility that you use the wrong device in a
control system. It compares the device that is defined in your project to the
installed device. If keying fails, a fault occurs. These attributes are compared.

Attribute Description
Vendor The device manufacturer.
Device Type The general type of the product, for example, digital I/O module.
Product Code The specific type of the product. The Product Code maps to a catalog number.
Major Revision A number that represents the functional capabilities of a device.
Minor Revision A number that represents behavior changes in the device.

The following Electronic Keying options are available.

Keying Option Description

Lets the installed device accept the key of the device that is defined in the project when the
installed device can emulate the defined device. With Compatible Module, you can typically
replace a device with another device that has the following characteristics:
Compatible • Same catalog number
Module • Same or higher Major Revision
• Minor Revision as follows:
– If the Major Revision is the same, the Minor Revision must be the same or higher.
– If the Major Revision is higher, the Minor Revision can be any number.
Indicates that the keying attributes are not considered when attempting to communicate with
a device. With Disable Keying, communication can occur with a device other than the type
specified in the project.
ATTENTION: Be cautious when using Disable Keying; if used incorrectly, this option can lead to
Disable Keying personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
We strongly recommend that you do not use Disable Keying.
If you use Disable Keying, you must take full responsibility for understanding whether the
device being used can fulfill the functional requirements of the application.
Indicates that all keying attributes must match to establish communication. If any attribute
Exact Match does not match precisely, communication with the device does not occur.

Carefully consider the implications of each keying option when selecting one.

IMPORTANT Changing Electronic Keying parameters online interrupts connections to

the device and any devices that are connected through the device.
Connections from other controllers can also be broken.
If an I/O connection to a device is interrupted, the result can be a loss of
data.

More Information

For more detailed information on Electronic Keying, see Electronic Keying in

Logix 5000 Control Systems Application Technique,
publication LOGIX-AT001.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 99

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Install the Adapters Install two 1715-AENTR adapters.

ADAPTER
1715-AENTR

Module Status
Redundancy Status
Network Status
Rack Status

Ethernet 1
Ethernet 2

Reset

To install the 1715-AENTR adapters on to the 1715-A2A two-slot base unit, follow
these steps.

IMPORTANT You must inspect the connector pins before you install the modules. If
you install modules with bent or damaged connector pins, it can
damage the backplane connectors.
Also, inspect the socket contacts on the backplane, and for an I/O
module, on the mating termination assembly. If a contact is damaged,
do not attempt to install the module.
1. Inspect the connector pins.

2. Inspect the identification labels on the sides of the adapters and record
the location and the module information that is shown on the label.

This helps you when installing a new or replacement module in the

future by allowing you to order the replacement parts without disturbing
the system.

100 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

3. Check the coding pegs on the 1715-A2A adapter backplane and verify that
they match the sockets on the back of the adapter.

4. Verify that the slot on the head of the adapter clamp screw is vertical.

Unlocked Position

5. Record the MAC addresses.

The MAC addresses are between slot 0 and 1 of the adapter base. Every
hardware component has its own unique MAC address. This hardware
address is affixed to the hardware on a label.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 101

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

6. Place the new module on to the dowel pin on the adapter base unit.

32077-M

Connect To Dowel Pins

102 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

7. Push the adapter in until the dowel pin and connectors are fully mated.

The status indicators in Table 13 illuminate. The table is a quick

installation reference. For more detailed status indicator information,
see Appendix A.

Table 13 - Startup Sequence

1715-AENTR Adapter
Indicator Status
Module Status Steady green
Redundancy Status Flashes, then steady green
Network Status Off
Rack Status Off, then steady green
Ethernet 1 Dependent on Ethernet connection status
Ethernet 2 Dependent on Ethernet connection status
8. Turn the locking screw on the front of the module a 1/4 turn clockwise to
lock, by using a 9 mm screwdriver.

Each module has a locking screw that secures it to its base unit. The
module has an interlock that detects when a module is locked or
unlocked.

IMPORTANT Modules run only in the locked position.

ADAPTER
1715-AENTR

Module Status
Redundancy Status
Network Status
Rack Status

Ethernet 1
Ethernet 2

1/4 Turn
To Lock Postion

Reset

For information about the functionality of the Reset button, see Reset Button
on page 203.

Assign an IP Address Before you can use the hardware, you must assign an IP address to the primary
adapter. This is done by associating an IP address to the MAC address of the
primary hardware component, in this case, the adapter base unit.

Assign only one primary IP address to the MAC address.

You only assign one IP address to this hardware. The firmware automatically
assigns the secondary IP address, which is the primary IP address + 1. The
secondary module is not visible in the RSLinx® Classic RSWho tool. It responds to
an Ethernet ping of its IP address.

Any BOOTP/DHCP server can be used to assign IP addresses.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 103

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Step 1: Assign an IP Address on the BOOTP/DHCP Server

To assign an address, follow this procedure to launch the BOOTP/DHCP

server.
1. From the Start button, choose Programs>Rockwell Software®>BOOTP-
DHCP Server>BOOTP-DHCP Server.

2. Verify BOOTP network settings. Choose Tools>Network Settings.

These settings are transmitted to the module along with your IP address,
so verify that they are the correct settings.

IMPORTANT • The adapter must be physically connected to the network running the BOOTP server.
• Multiple MAC address requests can be received. The lowest MAC addresses correspond to the leftmost adapter slot, or
primary adapter. Do not assign an IP address to the higher MAC address requests, as these addresses correspond to
the rightmost adapter slot, or secondary module.
• We recommend that you manually enter the MAC address. Sometimes the settings of your personal computer can help
prevent you from obtaining MAC address requests from your BOOTP/DHCP server. Check the documentation for your
BOOTP/DHCP server for more help. See Knowledgebase article 32648 for more details.
https://rockwellautomation.custhelp.com/app/answers/detail/a_id/32648
• The MAC address is found on the label on the front of the adapter backplane. The top MAC address corresponds to the
primary adapter in the leftmost slot.
00:A0:EC:00:24:8C
00:A0:EC:00:24:91

Top MAC Address

104 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

3. Click OK.

The Request History panel displays the hardware addresses of modules

issuing BOOTP requests.
4. Click New to type in the MAC address.

8:55:08 BOOTP 00:A0:EC:00:24:8C

5. Enter the MAC address that you found at the top of the label on the
adapter backplane.
6. Double-click the hardware (MAC) address of the module to be
configured.

The New Entry window appears.

7. Enter the MAC address in the Ethernet Address (MAC): field.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 105

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

00:A0:EC:00:24:8C

8. Enter the IP address that you want to use in the IP address field.

00:A0:EC:00:24:8C

9. Click OK.

IMPORTANT • IP addresses can be recovered, if needed, in the Module Properties tab.

• The second adapter (rightmost) has a MAC address that is the first
adapter’s (leftmost) MAC address + 2 in HEX.
10. Click Disable BootP/DHCP to set from dynamic to static.

Step 2: Configure the Module with RSLinx Classic Software

To use RSLinx Classic software to configure the adapter on the Ethernet

network, follow these steps.
1. Launch RSLinx Classic software.
2. From the Communications menu, choose RSWho.

3. Navigate in RSWho to the Ethernet network.

106 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

4. If a 1715 device is not recognized, a question mark appears instead of the

icon of the module or backplane. Right-click the device and select Upload
EDS file from device.

10.88.92.93, 1715-AENTR

5. Right-click the 1715 EtherNet/IP module and choose Module

Configuration.
6. Click the Port Configuration tab.

The Module Configuration dialog box appears.

1715-AENTR

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 107

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

7. For Network Configuration Type, click Static to assign this configuration

to the port.
a. In the IP Address field, verify the IP address.
b. In the Network Mask field, verify the network mask address.

The other fields are optional depending on your network and/or IT

requirements. Verify or complete as needed.
8. Click OK.

Install the I/O Modules The I/O modules that are used for the 1715 Redundant I/O system are as
follows:
• 1715-IB16D 16-channel digital input module
• 1715-OB8DE 8-channel digital output module
• 1715-IF16 16-channel analog input module
• 1715-OF8I 8-channel analog output module
Figure 60 - I/O Modules
1715-IB16D 16-channel Digital 1715-OB8DE 8-channel Digital 1715-IF16 16-channel Analog 1715-OF8I 8-channel Analog
Input Module Output Module Input Module Output Module

DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL OUTPUT ANALOG INPUT ANALOG OUTPUT

1715-IB16D 1715-OB8DE 1715-IF16 1715-OF8I

Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy

Ready Ready Ready Ready
Run Run Run Run
Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00 Channel 00
Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 01
Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02
Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03
Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04
Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05
Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06 Channel 06
Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channel 07

Channel 08 Channel 08
Channel 09 Channel 09
Channel 10 Channel 10
Channel 11 Channel 11
Channel 12 Channel 12
Channel 13 Channel 13
Channel 14 Channel 14
Channel 15 Channel 15

Modules are installed by pressing them onto the 1715-A3IO three-slot base unit.
Follow these steps.
1. Inspect the connector pins, see page 100.
2. Inspect the identification labels on the sides of the modules and record
the location and the module information that is shown on the label.

This helps you when installing a new or replacement module in the

future by allowing you to order the replacement parts without disturbing
the system.

108 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

3. Check the coding pegs on the termination assembly and verify that they
match the sockets on the back of the I/O module, see page 101.
4. Verify that the slot on the head of the module clamp screw is vertical, see
page 101.
5. Place the new module on to the dowel pin on the I/O base unit, see page
102.
6. Push the module in until the connectors are fully mated.

The status indicators in Table 14 illuminate depending on which module you

are installing. The table is a quick installation reference. For more detailed
status indicator information, see Appendix A.

Table 14 - Startup Sequence

1715-IB16D, 1715-OB8DE, 1715-IF16, and 1715-OF8I Modules
Indicator Status
Module Status Green
Redundancy Status Off
Network Status Red
Channel 0…7, 8…15 Off
7. Turn the locking screw on the front of the module a 1/4 turn clockwise to
lock, see page 103.
• The Redundancy Status indicator of the 1715-IB16D digital input
module shows RED when the screw is locked.
• The Redundancy Status indicator of the 1715-IF16 analog input module
shows RED when the screw is locked.

The module enters its startup sequence. This takes approximately

3 seconds.

If the module is the first module in a TA group with a running adapter, it

displays the following status indicators. See Table 15.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 109

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Table 15 - First Module in TA Group

1715-IB16D, 1715-OB8DE, and 1715-IF16 Modules 1715-OF8I Module
Indicator Status Indicator Status
Module Status Green Module Status Green
Redundancy Status Green Redundancy Status Red to steady green
Network Status Amber Network Status Amber
Channel 0…7, 8…15 Off Channel 0…7 Off
8. If the module is installed next to other modules that are already online,
the startup sequence completes.

When startup is complete, the status indicators light as follows.

1715-IB16D, 1715-OB8DE, 1715-IF16 Modules 1715-OF8I Module

Indicator Status Indicator Status
Module Status Green Module Status Green
Redundancy Status Green Redundancy Status Red to steady green
Network Status Green Network Status Amber
Inputs show Green; Inputs show Green;
Channel 0…7, 8…15 Channel 0…7
Outputs show Amber Outputs show Amber

If the module fails to go online, see the troubleshooting guide in

Chapter 7.

Install Slot Filler Covers To install the slot filler covers, follow these steps.
1. Place a slot filler cover on the empty slot.
2. Screw the clamp screw 90° to the lock position by using a 9 mm
screwdriver.

TERMINAL IDENTITY
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

AOTA

Slot Filler Covers

Dual.

Module Status Module Status

Redundancy Status Redundancy Status
Network Status Network Status
Rack Status Rack Status

Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1
Ethernet 2 Ethernet 2

Reset Reset

110 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Remove Modules Modules can be removed online without shutting down the system or
upsetting the process in redundant configurations only. However, pulling out
simplex module impacts the process.

Remove modules by carefully pulling them out of the base unit by using this
procedure.
1. Turn the locking screw on the front of the module 1/4 turn counter-
clockwise.

The screw slot is vertical when the module is unlocked.

Turn locking screw 1/4 turn

counter-clockwise until
vertical.

Unlocked Position

2. Carefully remove the module from the base unit.

Pull straight out.

Dowel Pins

IMPORTANT Make sure that you pull the module straight out when removing it from
the base unit. Do not rock, or tilt the module while pulling it out, as it
could damage the dowel pins.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 111

Chapter 2 Installation Instructions

Notes:

112 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 3

Security

Protected Mode The adapter uses the implicit I/O strategy to enter and exit Protected mode.
The use of an implicit I/O strategy means that no action is required to enter or
leave Protected mode. Protected mode helps prevent the following actions:
• The reset of the 1715-AENTR module is prohibited if it is producing or
consuming I/O or if it is bridging to an I/O module.
• The reset of an I/O module is prohibited if it is producing or consuming
I/O.
• The use of ControlFLASH™ is prohibited for a 1715 AENTR module in
Protected mode.

The 1715-AENTR recovery image does not support I/O and does not enter
Protected mode, so ControlFLASH is available at any time.

Web Server Control The 1715-AENTR contains a web server that can provide diagnostic
information to a web browser. In revision 3.xxx and later, the web server is
disabled by default and can be enabled or disabled via the Security tab of the
1715-AENTR module properties (Figure 61). In revision 2.xxx and earlier, the
web server is always enabled.

To access the diagnostic information, direct your web browser to the IP

address assigned to the 1715-AENTR.

Figure 61 - Enable Webserver Checkbox

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 113

Chapter 3 Security

Notes:

114 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 4

Digital I/O Operation

1715 Digital Module Overview The 1715 digital I/O modules are I/O modules that provide On/Off detection
and actuation. By using the producer/consumer network model, digital I/O
modules can produce information when needed while providing more system
functions.

The 1715 digital I/O modules mount in a 1715 Redundant I/O System and use an
I/O termination assembly that is mounted in an I/O base unit to communicate
via redundant 1715 adapters.

Before you install and use your module, you must do the following:
• Install and ground a user-supplied, 24V DC power supply.
• Determine if you are using your digital I/O module in Simplex or Duplex
mode.
• Install the correct termination assembly that is based on your
determination for either simplex or duplex operation.
• Configure the project in RSLogix 5000® software or the Logix Designer
application to accept the number and type of modules for the project.

Each digital I/O module is an isolated module that plugs into one position of
the I/O base unit and a termination assembly that is mounted to the base unit.
Digital I/O modules can be configured in RSLogix™ programming software as
simplex or duplex and then by selecting one of the two available termination
assemblies and the required number of modules.

Termination assemblies provide termination for the field I/O channels and, by
the use of coding pegs and sockets, are matched to a specific digital I/O
module. Module keying can also be set in the project. Field connections are
made at the terminal block connectors on the termination assembly.

The digital I/O modules and termination assemblies for the 1715 Redundant
I/O system are as follows.

Table 16 - Types of ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules and Components

Cat. No. Description
1715-IB16D 16-channel digital input module
1715-OB8DE 8-channel digital output module
1715-TASIB16D 16-channel digital input simplex termination assembly
1715-TADIB16D 16-channel digital input duplex termination assembly
1715-TASOB8DE 8-channel digital output simplex termination assembly
1715-TAD0B8DE 8-channel digital output duplex termination assembly

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 115

Chapter 4 Digital I/O Operation

1715-IB16D Digital Input Module

The digital input interface is a combination of digital input modules and

termination assemblies. The 24V DC isolated digital input modules have a
flexible and fail-safe design. The 1715-IB16D interfaces 16 digital input channels
and can be configured in RSLogix programming software as simplex or duplex
by selecting one of the two available termination assemblies and the required
number of modules.

IMPORTANT When the 1715-IB16D digital input module is used with the 1715-TASIB16D
simplex termination assembly, it is nonisolated.

The 1715-IB16D digital input module has the following features:

• Flexible, modular construction for user-configured I/O applications
• 16-channel connection capability
• Suitable for simplex, duplex connections, and fault tolerant applications
• Independent, galvanically isolated input channels
• Built-in diagnostic testing and independent watchdog facility
• Module removal and replacement online and, when in Duplex mode, no
interruption of the signal inputs
• Input voltage data is provided for line monitoring and field fault
detection
• Time stamp value per channel, which records the time of any transition
of state from ON->OFF or OFF->ON. Note that this value is overwritten
with each change of state of the input.

1715-OB8DE Digital Output Module

The digital output module interface consists of a combination of digital output

modules and digital output termination assemblies. Each module provides
eight isolated output channels and plugs into one position of the I/O base unit
and a corresponding termination assembly. Digital outputs can be configured
as simplex or duplex.

The 1715-OB8DE digital output module has a flexible, fail-safe design, with
eight field output channels. The module output can be up to 1 A continuous for
each channel.

The 1715-OB8DE digital output module features are as follows:

• Eight isolated output channels per module
• Fail-safe design and operation
• Suitable for simplex and duplex connections for fault tolerant
applications
• Duplex series output switches with overload protection for each channel
• Voltage and current monitoring on each channel with reverse current
protection
• Short circuit and open circuit line fault detection
• Dual redundant field power feed capabilities without the need for
external diodes
• When fitted in duplex configuration, modules can be replaced online
without system interruption

116 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 4 Digital I/O Operation

ATTENTION: Maintenance must be performed only by qualified personnel,

otherwise, personal injury or death, or damage to the system can result.

Common Features

The table lists several features available on 1715 digital I/O modules.

Feature Description
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) You can remove and insert modules while power is applied.
Module level fault reporting and field-side Fault and diagnostic detection capabilities that provide you the
information necessary to use your module and troubleshoot your
diagnostic detection application most effectively and efficiently.

Input Module Compatibility The 1715 digital input modules interface to sensing devices and detect whether
they are ON or OFF. The 1715 digital input modules convert DC ON/OFF signals
from user devices to appropriate logic level for use within the 1715 Redundant
I/O System. Typical input devices include the following:
• Proximity switches
• Limit switches
• Selector switches
• Float switches
• Push button switches

When designing a system by using 1715 digital input modules, you must
consider these items:
• The voltage necessary for your application
• Whether you need a solid-state device
• Current leakage
• If your application uses sinking or sourcing wiring

For more information on digital input modules, see the 1715 Technical
Specifications, publication 1715-TD001.

Termination Assemblies

There are two types of termination assemblies for the digital input modules.
The application of your system determines which termination assembly that
you need:
• 1715-TASIB16D 16-channel, digital input simplex termination assembly
• 1715-TADIB16D 16-channel, digital input duplex termination assembly

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 117

Chapter 4 Digital I/O Operation

Output Module Compatibility 1715 digital output modules can be used to drive various output devices. Typical
output devices compatible with the 1715 digital outputs include the following:
• Motor starters
• Solenoids
• Indicators

When designing a system, do the following:

• Make sure that the outputs can supply the necessary surge and
continuous current for proper operation.
• Make sure that the surge and continuous current are not exceeded.
Damage to the module could result.

When sizing output loads, check the documentation that is supplied with the
output device for the surge and continuous current necessary to operate the
device.

The 1715 digital outputs can directly drive the 1715 digital inputs. The
exceptions are DC diagnostic input modules. When diagnostics are used, a
shunt resistor is required for leakage current.

For more information specifically on the compatibility of motor starters to

output modules, see ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules, publication
1756-UM058.

Termination Assemblies

There are two types of termination assemblies for the digital output modules.
The application of your system determines which termination assembly that
you need:
• 1715-TASOB8DE 8-channel, digital output, simplex termination assembly
• 1715-TADOB8DE 8-channel, digital output duplex termination assembly

Features Common to 1715 The following features are common to all 1715 digital I/O modules.
Standard Digital I/O Modules
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)

All 1715 digital I/O modules can be inserted and removed from the I/O base unit
while power is applied. This feature lets you have greater availability of the
overall control system because, while the module is being removed or inserted,
there is no additional disruption to the rest of the controlled process.

118 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 4 Digital I/O Operation

Module Fault Reporting

1715 digital I/O modules provide hardware and software indication when a
module fault has occurred. The status indicator of each module and the Logix
Designer application graphically displays this fault and includes a fault
message about the nature of the fault. This feature lets you determine how
your module has been affected and what action must be taken to resume
normal operation.

Fully Software Configurable

The Studio 5000 Logix Designer® application uses a custom, easily understood
interface to write configuration. All module features are enabled or disabled
through the I/O configuration portion of the software. You can also use the
software to interrogate any module in the system to retrieve the following:
• Vendor
• Product Type
• Product Code
• Revision
• Serial Number
• Product Name

The elimination of tasks, such as setting hardware switches and jumpers,

improves the ease of module configuration.

Module Inhibiting

Module inhibiting lets you indefinitely suspend a connection between an

owner-controller and a digital I/O module without having to remove the
module from the configuration. This process lets you temporarily disable
communication to a module to perform maintenance. You can inhibit a
module in the following ways:
• You write the configuration for an I/O module but inhibit the module to
help prevent it from communicating with the owner-controller. In this
case, the owner does not establish a connection and configuration is not
sent to the module until the connection is uninhibited.
• In your application, a controller already owns a module, has downloaded
the configuration to the module, and is exchanging data over the
connection between the devices. In this case, you can inhibit the module
and the owner-controller behaves as if the connection to the module does
not exist.

IMPORTANT Whenever you inhibit an output module, it enters the Program mode and
all outputs change to the state configured for the Program mode. For
example, if an output module is configured so that the state of the
outputs goes to zero during Program mode, whenever that module is
inhibited, the outputs go to zero.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 119

Chapter 4 Digital I/O Operation

These examples are instances where you can use module inhibiting:
• You want to upgrade / replace digital I/O modules. This procedure is only
required when either changing / replacing a simplex module or when
both duplex modules are removed before one is replaced. We
recommend that you do the following.
a. Inhibit the module.
b. Perform the upgrade (module change).
c. Uninhibit the module.
• You are using a program that includes a module that is not physically
installed, but you do not want the controller to look for a module that
does not exist yet. In this case, you can inhibit the module in your
program until it physically resides in the proper slot.

Status Indicator Information

Each 1715 digital I/O module has a status indicator on the front of the module
that lets you check the module health and operational status of a module. The
status indicator displays vary for each module.

See Appendix A, 1715 Digital Input Module on page 286, for detailed status
indicator information.

Features Specific to The features that are described in this section are available on 1715 digital input
1715-IB16D Digital Input modules.
Modules
Data Transfer on Either Cyclic Time or Change of State

Digital input modules always send data at the RPI, but they send data only at a
change of state if the COS feature is enabled. COS is more efficient than RPI
because it multicasts data only when a change occurs.

The table describes the two ways that a module sends data to the owner-
controller.

Topic Description
A user-defined rate at which the module updates the information that is sent to its
Requested packet interval owner-controller. Also known as Cyclic Data Transfer.
Configurable feature that, when enabled, instructs the module to update its owner-
controller with new data whenever a specified input point transitions from On to Off
Change of state and Off to On. The data is sent at the RPI rate when there is no change of state. By
default, this setting is always enabled for input modules.

120 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 4 Digital I/O Operation

Set RPI

The Connection tab on the Module Properties dialog box lets you enter a
requested packet interval (RPI). The RPI sets the slowest rate at which data is
multicast to the owner-controller.

The actual data transfer rate of the module can be faster than the RPI setting.
But, the RPI provides a defined, maximum period when data is transferred to
the owner-controller.

1. Choose from the options in the Connection tab.

Parameter Description
Requested Packet Interval (RPI) Enter an RPI value or use the default.
Check the checkbox to help prevent communication between the owner-controller and the module. This
Inhibit Module option enables the module to be maintained without faults being reported to the controller.
Check the box to create a major fault if there is a connection failure with the module while in Run mode.
Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode For important information on this checkbox, see ‘Configure a Major Fault to Occur’ in the Logix 5000
Controllers Information and Status Programming Manual, publication 1756-PM015.
Choose between unicast and multicast for EtherNet/IP™ connections. This checkbox is enabled when the
module supports unicast at the current revision and any part of the module path crosses EtherNet/IP.
The checkbox is checked and dimmed when the module supports only unicast and any part of the module
path crosses the EtherNet/IP network.
The checkbox is not checked and dimmed if these conditions are true:
• The current revision of the module does not support unicast. If a module is multicast only, no revision
Use Unicast Connection over EtherNet/IP supports unicast.
• The module is proxied (for example, 1734, 1738 and 1794 modules) and the current revision of the parent
does not support Unicast.
Unicast is not supported with ControlLogix® Redundancy, version 19.52. For more details, see
Knowledgebase article Enhanced Redundancy will not Synchronize with Error Message: Unicast Connection
Not Supported.

2. Click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 121

Chapter 4 Digital I/O Operation

Enable Change of State

The Point column (on the left side of the Configuration tab) lets you determine
whether a change of state occurs when a field device becomes Off to On or On
to Off.
1. On the Module Properties dialog box, click the Configuration tab.

2. Do one of the following:

• Check a checkbox to enable COS for a specific point for either Off to
On or On to Off.
• Clear the checkbox to disable the COS for a specific point.
3. Click OK.

See Threshold Values for Digital Inputs on page 261 for setting custom
threshold configurations.

Field-side Diagnostics

For 1715-IB16D thresholds, you are responsible for designing a circuit that
provides unique voltage levels for Wire OFF, OFF, ON, and shorted to 24V DC.
This design typically involves an inline and shunt resistor:
• A typical value for the inline resistor is 3.9 k.
• A typical value for the shunt resistor is 15 k. This generates an OFF
voltage of 5V DC and an ON voltage of 14V DC if the supply voltage is
24V DC.

The digital input module can detect the voltage level, much like an analog
input module. There are no circuit tests on field wiring. You define your
diagnostic granularity by using custom thresholds that are built in to the
channel configuration. For full diagnostics, you design a circuit for which the
OFF state is, for example, 5V DC, and the ON state, which is, for example, 15V
DC. Wire OFF creates 0V DC, which falls below the OFF threshold, and
OpenWire fault status is set HI. A short to 24V DC is above the ON threshold,
and Short Circuit fault status is sent HI.

122 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 4 Digital I/O Operation

Features Specific to The features that are described in this section are available on all 1715 digital
1715-OB8DE Digital Output output modules.
Modules
Field Power Status Integers

The field power status integers (all DINT) supply data to the application, about
the field power supplies to a group of digital output modules.

Group Field Power Current

Values: 0 to 8,000 mA or greater (limited by capacity of DINT variable)

Description: Reports the total current that all the active digital output modules
in a group draw from the field power supply. Accuracy is ± 10%.

Field Power Voltage 1

Values: 0 to 48,000 mV or larger (limited by capacity of DINT variable)

Description: Reports the voltage from the field power supply for the specified
module and field power input. Accuracy is ± 500 mV.

Field Power Voltage 2

Values: 0 to 48,000 mV or larger (limited by capacity of DINT variable)

Description: Reports the voltage from the field power supply for the specified
module and field power input. Accuracy is ± 500 mV.

Field Fault Detection

Detection criteria differs depending on whether the output is energized or de-

energized.

Energized Open Circuit

Current per channel is < 10 mA regardless of whether the digital output

module is on its own or in dual pair.

Energizing Short Circuit

When energizing, the output switch is set to flow a constant current of 2.5 A
for up to 50 ms (5 A if dual module). If the voltage across the output switch fails
to fall below 3V within this time, then the output load is deemed to be short
circuited and the output is switched off

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 123

Chapter 4 Digital I/O Operation

Energized Short Circuit

After the output is energized, another calculation is used. Any current in

excess of 2.5 A (5 A if a dual module) is integrated and the duration time is
multiplied by the current. The product is energy. The current and
corresponding durations are measured and compared with the output switch
ratings.

The following list shows the nominal times for which particular bands of
current are tolerated before the switch declares short circuit and de-energizes:
• <5 A: 25.7 ms
• ≥5 A, <10 A: 3.2 ms
• ≥10 A, <15 A: 1.7 ms
• ≥15 A, <20 A: 1.0 ms
• ≥20 A: 0.9 ms

These times also account for delays that are associated with current filtering
that is implemented to reduce the impact of electromagnetic interference
(EMI).

Energized Field Fault

A field fault is declared when the channel voltage is ≥1V above the field supply
voltage (VF).

De-energized open circuit

The channel voltage is pulled up to (VF/2)-0.75 V, through an impedance of

26 kΩ in each module (so 13 kΩ for a dual pair) when open circuit and de-
energized. In this state, it is declared as open circuit if the channel voltage is
within the band of voltage around this point.

The load must draw the channel voltage down below (VF/3) for it to be seen as
present, so it must still flow a small current when de-energized. The current
can be calculated as:

((VF/6)-0.75 V)/impedance

Where the impedance is 26 kΩ or 13 kΩ as above

De-energized short circuit

A short circuit cannot be detected when de-energized without a partial supply

of current.

The output current increases until one of these conditions occurs:

• The current reaches 50 mA
• The output electro motive force (EMF) increases by 2 volts
• The calculated energy of the pulse reaches 5 mJ. A timeout condition also
exists to catch module faults, but this does not impact short circuit
detection.

124 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 4 Digital I/O Operation

Upon reaching a threshold, the actual change in voltage is divided by the actual
change in current to yield a value representing the field load resistance. If this
is less than 10 Ω, then a short circuit is declared. The test currently occurs once
per minute sequenced across all output modules.

Configurable Point-level Output Fault States

Individual outputs can be independently configured to unique fault states,

either On, Off, or Hold if there is a communication failure or Program mode.

IMPORTANT Whenever you inhibit an output module, it enters the Program mode
and all outputs change to the state configured for the Program mode.
For example, if an output module is configured so that the state of the
outputs turns off during Program mode, whenever that module is
inhibited, the outputs turn off.

Follow these steps to enable a fault state.

1. On the Module Properties dialog box, click the Configuration tab.

2. Choose the Fault mode.

3. Click OK.

Output Data Echo

IMPORTANT • Inhibiting a module is handled the same way as a communication failure.

• Setting the radio button to "Leave outputs in Program Mode state"
causes the outputs to go to the Program Mode state when inhibited.
• Setting the radio button to "Change outputs to Fault Mode state" causes
the outputs to go to the Fault Mode state when inhibited.

During normal operation, when a processor sends out an output command to

the 1715 system, the output module that is targeted for that command returns
the commanded state of the output to the system. This process verifies that the
module has received the command and tries to execute it.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 125

Chapter 4 Digital I/O Operation

Monitor Fault Bits

The Output Data Echo matches only the commanded state of the outputs if the
module is operating under normal conditions. If there is an anomaly with the
module, the commanded state and the Output Data Echo cannot not match.

You can monitor the fault bits for your output points for fault conditions. If a
fault occurs, the fault bit is set and your program alerts you to the condition. In
this case, the output data echo cannot not match the commanded state of the
outputs.

If there is a mismatch between the commanded state of the outputs and the
Output Data Echo, check your output module for these conditions:
• Communication fault
• Connection is inhibited
• Blown fuse - Module does not turn on output if overload/short circuit is
detected

Fusing

Some digital outputs have internal electronic or mechanical fusing to help

prevent too much current from flowing through the module. This feature helps
protect the module from electrical damage. Other modules require external
fusing.

The 1715-OB8DE module uses electronic fusing.

You can reset an electronic fuse through the Logix Designer application or
through ladder logic. This feature has a corresponding tag that can be
examined in the user program if there is a fault.

See Table 18 to determine what fuse to use in your application.

Table 17 - Recommended Fuses

Circuit Type Cat. No. Fusing on the module Recommended Fuse
DC 1715-OB8DE(1) (2) (3) Yes - Fused on a per point basis Electronically fused
(1) Electronic protection is not intended to replace fuses, circuit breakers, or other code required wiring protection devices.
(2) The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short circuit
conditions. The protection is based on a thermal cut-out principle. If there is a short-circuit condition on an output channel,
that channel limits the current within milliseconds after its thermal cut-out temperature has been reached.
(3) The module does not provide protection against reverse polarity or wiring to AC power sources.

126 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 4 Digital I/O Operation

Follow these steps to reset a fuse.

1. On the Module Properties dialog box, click the Configuration tab.

2. Click Reset for a particular point on the module to reset a fuse.

3. Click OK.

Diagnostic Latch Information

Diagnostic latching lets this module latch a fault in the set position once it has
been triggered, even if the error condition causing the fault to occur
disappears.

The Reset Diagnostic Latch service can clear latched diagnostic features.

IMPORTANT Diagnostic latches are also reset through a software reset or when the
power is cycled for the I/O module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 127

Chapter 4 Digital I/O Operation

Follow these steps to enable diagnostic latch of information.

1. On the Module Properties dialog box, click the Configuration tab.

2. Do one of the following:

• Check a checkbox to enable diagnostic latching for a specific point.
• Clear the checkbox to disable diagnostic latching for a specific point.
3. Click OK.

Shutdown State

The output module shutdown state defines the behavior of the output module
if communications to the module fail within the timeout period or if the
processor is put into Program mode. This occurs on a channel-by-channel
basis. These principles apply for the 1715 analog and digital output modules.

The shutdown state can be configured to these values:

• On-energize
• Off-de-energize
• Hold last state

128 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 4 Digital I/O Operation

During normal operation with an adapter present, the state of the outputs can
be configured when no connections from a Logix controller are active.

Analog output modules can be configured to OFF, HOLD LAST VALUE, or

GOTO SPECIFIED VALUE.

IMPORTANT In Shutdown mode, the analog output module will TURN OFF all channel
status indicators irrespective of the value being output.

Energize-on-communication-failure

The 1715 Redundant I/O System can be a part of an energize-on

communication failure system. This means that during a system fault, the
output module can be set so that the output is energized. This is on a point-by-
point basis. The following are examples of energize-to-trip uses:
• A fan that runs a ventilation system
• Emergency lights

De-energize-to-trip

During output, when a system fault occurs, the output module can be set so
that the output is de-energized. This is on a point-by-point basis. The following
are examples of de-energize-to-trip uses:
• Motor starters
• Safety contactors

Disable Line Test

The digital output module incorporates line test functionality that can report
and indicate ‘no load’ field faults. This functionality can be enabled or disabled
by checking or unchecking the box. This is on a point-by-point basis.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 129

Chapter 4 Digital I/O Operation

Fault and Status Reporting The 1715 digital input modules unicast fault and status data to any owner-
between Input Modules and controllers. All input modules maintain a module-fault word, the highest level
of fault reporting. Additional fault information is provided in separate tags.
Controllers
The table lists the tag that can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a
fault has occurred for a standard input module.

Tag Description
Module-fault word This word provides fault summary reporting. its tag name is Fault. This word is available on all digital input modules.
Fault DINT Fault (Radix = Binary) - 0 at least one module present
- FFFFFFFF No Logix connection, all additional tags are not valid
Simplex Digital Input Module Additional Tags Include
GroupFault BIT - 1 if any point on the module is faulted/failed
PtFault INT (Radix = Binary) - 1 bit per point 0…15; 1 if point is faulted/failed
OpenWire INT (Radix = Binary) - 1 bit per point 0…15; 1 indicates open wire
ShortCircuit INT (Radix = Binary) - 1 bit per point 0…15; 1 indicates short circuit
Indeterminate INT (Radix = Binary) - 1 bit per point 0…15; 1 indicates indeterminate
Duplex Digital Input Module Additional Tags Include
ModAFault BOOL - 0 Good, 1 fault or module not present
ModBFault BOOL - 0 Good, 1 fault or module not present
GroupFault BOOL - 1 if any point on either module is faulted/failed
ModAGroupFault BOOL - 1 if any point on Module A is faulted/failed
ModBGroupFault BOOL - 1 if any point on Module B is faulted/failed
PtFault INT (Radix = Binary) - 1 bit per point 0…15; 1 if point is faulted/failed on both modules
ModAPtFault INT (Radix = Binary) - 1 bit per Channel 0…15; 1 if channel has failed on module A
ModBPtFault INT (Radix = Binary) - 1 bit per Channel 0…15; 1 if channel has failed on module B
OpenWire INT (Radix = Binary) - 1 bit per point 0…15; 1 indicates open wire
ShortCircuit INT (Radix = Binary) - 1 bit per point 0…15; 1 indicates short circuit
Indeterminate INT (Radix = Binary) - 1 bit per point 0…15; 1 indicates indeterminate

All words are 32 bit, although only the number of bits appropriate for the
density of each module are used.

Condition Set Bits

Communication fault All 32 bits are set to 1, regardless of the module’s density.

This illustration offers an overview of the fault reporting process on 1715

standard digital input modules.

Bit 31 Bit 0

Module-fault Word
All Modules

A communication fault sets all bits in the module-fault word.

130 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 4 Digital I/O Operation

Fault and Status Reporting The 1715 digital output modules unicast fault and status data to any owner-
between Output Modules controllers. All output modules maintain a module-fault word, the highest level
of fault reporting. Additional fault information is provided in separate tags.
and Controllers
The table lists the tags that can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a
fault has occurred for a standard output module.

Tag Description
Simplex Digital Output Module Tags Include
Fault DINT Fault (Radix = Binary) - 0 at least one module present, data good
- FFFFFFFF No Logix connection, data bad, all additional tags are not valid

ReadBack SINT (Radix = Binary) - 1-bit readback per point 0…7

GroupFault BOOL - 1 if any point on the module is faulted/failed
PtFault SINT (Radix = Binary) - 1 bit per point 0…7; 1 if point is faulted/failed
NoLoad SINT (Radix = Binary) - 1 bit per point 0…7; 1 indicates no load
ShortCircuit SINT (Radix = Binary) - 1 bit per point 0…7; 1 indicates short circuit
Duplex Digital Output Module Tags Include
Fault DINT Fault (Radix = Binary) - 0 at least one module present
- FFFFFFFF No Logix connection, all additional tags are not valid
ReadBack SINT (Radix = Binary) - 1-bit readback per point 0…7
ModAFault BOOL - 0 Good, 1 fault or module not present
ModBFault BOOL - 0 Good, 1 fault or module not present
GroupFault BOOL - 1 if any point on either module is faulted/failed
ModAGroupFault BOOL - 1 if any point on Module A is faulted/failed
ModBGroupFault BOOL - 1 if any point on Module B is faulted/failed
PtFault INT (Radix = Binary) - 1 bit per point 0…15; 1 if point is faulted/failed on both modules
ModAPtFault INT (Radix = Binary) - 1 bit per Channel 0…15; 1 if channel has failed on module A
ModBPtFault INT (Radix = Binary) - 1 bit per Channel 0…15; 1 if channel has failed on module B
NoLoad SINT (Radix = Binary) - 1 bit per point 0…7; 1 indicates no load
ShortCircuit SINT (Radix = Binary) - 1 bit per point 0…7; 1 indicates short circuit

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 131

Chapter 4 Digital I/O Operation

Notes:

132 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 5

Analog I/O Operation

1715 Analog Module The 1715 analog I/O modules mount in a 1715 Redundant I/O System and use an
Overview I/O termination assembly that is mounted in an I/O base unit to communicate
via redundant 1715 adapters.

Before you install and use your module, you must do the following:
• Install and ground a user-supplied, 24V DC power supply.
• Determine whether you are using your analog I/O module in Simplex or
Duplex mode.
• Install the correct termination assembly that is based on your
determination for either simplex or duplex operation.

Each analog I/O module is an isolated module that plugs into one position of
the I/O base unit and a termination assembly that is mounted to the base unit.
Analog I/O modules can be configured in the Logix Designer application as
simplex (not redundant) or duplex (redundant).

Termination assemblies provide termination for the field I/O channels and, by
the use of coding pegs and sockets, are matched to a specific analog I/O
module. Module keying can also be set in the RSLogix 5000® or Logix Designer
application. Field connections are made at the terminal block connectors on
the termination assembly.

The analog I/O modules and termination assemblies for the 1715 Redundant
I/O system are as follows.

Table 18 - Types of ControlLogix® Analog I/O Modules and Components

Cat. No. Description
1715-IF16 16-channel analog input module
1715-OF8I 8-channel analog output module
1715-TASIF16 16-channel analog input simplex termination assembly
1715-TADIF16 16-channel analog input duplex termination assembly
1715-TASOF8 8-channel analog output simplex termination assembly
1715-TADOF8 8-channel analog output duplex termination assembly

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 133

Chapter 5 Analog I/O Operation

1715-IF16 Analog Input Module

The analog input interface is a combination of input modules and analog input
termination assemblies. The 16-channel analog input module has a flexible and
fail-safe design.

The 1715-IF16 analog input module features are as follows:

• Flexible, modular construction for user-configured I/O applications
• 16-channel connection capability
• Suitable for simplex, duplex connections, and fault tolerant applications
• Independent, galvanically isolated input channels
• Built-in diagnostic testing and independent watchdog facility
• Module removal and replacement online and, when in Duplex mode, no
interruption of the signal inputs

The internal isolated power supply from the 24V DC dual redundant system
power inputs produces module power. The isolated power supply provides
power to the module and is protected by overvoltage and undervoltage
detection circuits. Supply voltage monitoring initiates a warning signal and
Power-off protective mode when a power failure is detected.

Internal diagnostics test the module at routine intervals. An independent

watchdog arrangement also monitors the module operation and provides
more fault containment by activating a shutdown mechanism when a fault is
detected.

IMPORTANT If a fault occurs during normal operation in a duplex configured system,

an input module can be removed and replaced without disrupting the
input signals to a live system.

The adapter also monitors the input data paths and can detect faults within
each input channel. A visual indication of the module status and individual
channel status is provided by an array of front panel indicators and can be
connected to application variables and viewed in the Logix Designer
application.

The termination assemblies can accept one or two input modules. Each
termination assembly provides passive signal load termination and
overvoltage protection for each input channel. The system provides flexible
input connectivity by mating specific termination assemblies with the relevant
number of input modules.

Table 19 - Performance Criteria for the Analog Input Module

Attribute Value
Data Input value least significant bit 0.98 µA
Channel Measurement Error at 25 °C (77 °F) ± 2 °C (± 3.6 °F)
After 1 year at 40 °C (104 °F) 0.21% + 10 µA
After 2 years at 40 °C (104 °F) 0.22% + 10 µA
After 5 years at 40 °C (104 °F) 0.23% +10 µA
Temperature drift (0.01% + 0.3 µA) per °C

134 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 5 Analog I/O Operation

1715-OF8I Analog Output Module

The analog output interface consists of analog output modules and output
termination assemblies. Each module provides eight isolated output channels
and plugs into the I/O base unit and a corresponding termination assembly.

Termination assemblies provide termination for eight output channels and

the coding pegs make sure they mate only with an analog output module. Field
connections are connected to the terminal block connectors on the
termination assembly.

The analog module provides 4…20 mA output current from each channel for
field devices.

The 1715-OF8I analog output module features are as follows:

• Flexible module structure for a user configurable system
• Supports eight field devices
• Secure communication between modules for fault tolerant operation
• Operates as a simplex or duplex configuration
• Two-terminal current regulating device
Table 20 - Performance Criteria for the Analog Output Module
Attribute Value
Data Input value least significant bit (control) 0.98 µA
Data Output value least significant bit (monitor) 3.9 µA
Channel Measurement Error at 25 °C (77 °F) ± 2 °C (±3.6 °F)
After 1 year at 40 °C (104 °F) 0.30% + 10 µA
After 2 years at 40 °C (104 °F) 0.35% + 10 µA
After 5 years at 40 °C (104 °F) 0.44% +10 µA
Temperature drift (0.01% + 0.1 µA) per °C

ATTENTION: Maintenance must be performed only by qualified personnel,

otherwise, personal injury or death, or damage to the system can result.

Features Common to All The following features that are described in this section are common to all 1715
Analog I/O Modules ControlLogix® analog I/O modules:
• Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
• Module fault reporting
• Fully software configurable
• Status indicators

Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)

All 1715 I/O modules can be inserted and removed from the chassis while power
is applied. This feature allows greater availability of the overall control system
because, while the module is being removed or inserted, there is no additional
disruption to the rest of the controlled process.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 135

Chapter 5 Analog I/O Operation

Module Fault Reporting

The 1715 analog I/O modules provide hardware and software indication when a
module fault has occurred. Each module has a status fault indicator and the
Logix Designer application graphically displays this fault and include a fault
message that describes the nature of the fault. This feature lets you determine
how your module has been affected and what action must be taken to resume
normal operation.

Fully Software Configurable

The Logix Designer application uses a custom, easily understood interface to

write configuration. All module features are enabled or disabled through the I/
O configuration portion of the software.

You can also use the software to interrogate any module in the system to
retrieve:
• Vendor
• Product Type
• Product Code
• Revision
• Serial Number
• Product Name

By eliminating such tasks, such as setting hardware switches and jumpers, the
software eases module configuration.

The keying options available with your 1715 analog I/O are outlined in
Chapter 2.

Status Indicator Information

Each 1715 analog I/O module has status indicators on the front of the module
that allow you to check the module health and operational status of a module.

Module Inhibiting

Module inhibiting lets you indefinitely suspend a connection between an

owner-controller and an analog I/O module. This process can occur in either of
these ways:
• You write the configuration of an I/O module but inhibit the module to
help prevent it from communicating with the owner-controller. In this
case, the owner does not establish a connection and configuration is not
sent to the module until the connection is uninhibited.
• In your application, a controller already owns a module, has downloaded
the configuration to the module, and is exchanging data over the
connection between the devices. In this case, you can inhibit the module
and the owner-controller behaves as if the connection to the module does
not exist.
136 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022
 Chapter 5 Analog I/O Operation

IMPORTANT Whenever you inhibit an output module, it enters the Program mode and
all outputs change to the state configured for the Program mode. For
example, if an output module is configured so that the state of the
outputs goes to zero during Program mode, whenever that module is
inhibited, the outputs goes to zero.

These examples are instances where you can use module inhibiting:
• You want to upgrade an analog I/O module. We recommend that you do
the following.
a. Inhibit the module.
b. Perform the upgrade.
c. Uninhibit the module.
• You are using a program that includes a module that is not physically
installed, but you do not want the controller to look for a module that
does not exist yet. In this case, you can inhibit the module in your
program until it physically resides in the proper slot.

Scaling The limits field is a variable that lets you set the channel output current values
based on a scaling factor. You set the minimum and maximum output values
by using the scaling factor. The scaling factor requires you to set a percentage
of the engineering values. This gives a linear transformation between the
engineering values and the output scaled values across the defined range.

The default minimum and maximum values are 0% equals 4 mA and 100%
equals 20 mA.

Regardless of the Limits field settings, the output current is clamped at

0…24 mA maximum.

The module can operate with values beyond the 4…20 mA range. If an input
signal beyond the low and high signals is present at the module (for example, 3
mA), that data is represented in terms of the engineering units set during
scaling. Table 21 shows example values that can appear based on the example
that is mentioned previously.

Table 21 - Current Values Represented in Engineering Units

Current Engineering Units Value
4 mA 0%
12 mA 50%
20 mA 100%

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 137

Chapter 5 Analog I/O Operation

Operating Modes This section discusses operating modes for the analog input and output
modules.

Online Mode

When fully online and operational, each channel provides a regulated current
over a 1…24 mA range for the analog input module and a 0…24 mA range for the
analog output module. The current values are set for each channel by the
commanded values that are received from the running application. The
module indicators are GREEN, and with all module indicators GREEN, none of
the channels are in the failed state; however, the channel indicators depend on
the individual channel status.

In the online mode, you can add a module to a group (in a duplex TA), or
change a module in a pair, with no impact on the reported channel values or
deviation between the regulated current. The unaffected module of a pair
provides the full output values.

Offline Mode

The module is in the Offline mode when it is installed, but is not locked in
position (locking screw that is not engaged). All channel outputs are off and
the channel indicators are OFF. The Healthy indicator is GREEN and the Ready
indicator goes OFF, while the Run indicator is RED. The module enters the
Shutdown mode when locked in position.

When a critical power fault is detected, the module automatically enters the
Shutdown mode and the Healthy indicator goes RED before it goes into Ready
mode.

Shutdown Mode

In the Shutdown mode, all channels regulate their output to shutdown settings
for each channel. The Ready and Run indicators are RED.

In a group arrangement, one module can be in shutdown while the other can
continue to be online and in the Run mode and regulate the output according
to the commanded values.

When the module is communicating with the processors in Shutdown mode, it

transitions to the Ready mode. If there is an application running, it transitions
to the Recover mode.

138 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 5 Analog I/O Operation

Ready Mode

All channels are off when in the Ready mode, the Ready indicator is GREEN
and the Run indicator is RED while the channel indicators are OFF. When an
application is started, the module transitions to the Run mode.

When a module loses communication with the processor, then it transitions

back to the Shutdown mode.

Run Mode

In the Run mode, all channels regulate the output current to the commanded
value for each individual channel. The Ready and Run indicators are GREEN.
You must make sure that all user-required values have been set (by using
RSLogix 5000® or Logix Designer application) before transitioning the module
to Run mode.

If for any reason a module does not receive commanded values, then the
module transitions to the Shutdown mode.

Shutdown States

You can configure the channel shutdown states to do one of the following:
• Turn-off/de-energize the channel
• Hold last state
• Regulate the output to a specified value

The shutdown state defaults to turn-off/de-energize.

IMPORTANT If no indicators are lit when the module is inserted, the base unit may
not have an incoming power supply, or the module may be faulty.

HART This section discusses The Highway Addressable Remote Transducer (HART®)
communication protocol, which is an open standard that is owned by the more
than 100 member companies in the HART Communication Foundation (HCF).
Products use the HART protocol to provide both analog 4…20 mA and digital
signals. Digital signals are combined with analog signals to provide control
and status data for field devices.

HART is available in revision 3.x and later.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 139

Chapter 5 Analog I/O Operation

HART Features

The support for HART in the 1715 Redundant I/O System has the following
features:
• HART support on every analog input and output channel
• Variables for each analog input and output channel to monitor HART
device information

Configuration of HART Variables

The Controller tags created when an analog input module (1715-IF16), or analog
output module (1715-OF8I), are added to an application, contain variables to
monitor HART data.

Make sure that your HART field devices support HART command 0 (‘read
unique ID’) and HART command 3 (‘read current and four dynamic variables’),
the 1715 redundant I/O system uses these commands to communicate with the
HART devices.

The 1715 analog input and output modules use HART command #03 to collect
data from the field device as defined by Revision 5 of the HART specification.
The data available from HART enabled field devices is reported to the
application in the AB:1715_ChHART_Struct substructure of the modules input
tag.

The structures provide the following:

• Process measurements and measurement status.
• Errors on HART communication seen by the field device.
• Status of the field device.
• Time in milliseconds since the data was last updated.

You can monitor the status of the field device and use this to report diagnostic
errors and manual configuration changes.

The HART data is also available to the user for monitoring purposes via the
HART Device Info tab of the I/O module properties.

IMPORTANT The update rate for HART data from field devices is slower than the
update rate for the 4...20 mA analog signal itself. HART data can take up
to 4 seconds to update a channel, depending on the device type and
configuration. This is not affected by the number of channels that are
enabled for HART, but is affected if HART Pass-Through is in use on the
channel.

140 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 5 Analog I/O Operation

Precautions for HART in a Safety System

IMPORTANT If you use HART in a safety system, take these precautions:

• Do not use HART variables as the primary initiator for a Safety
Instrumented Function. The HART protocol does not meet the applicable
integrity levels for Safety Instrumented Functions.
• Make sure that HART is disabled for field devices that do not have a
locked configuration. This helps prevent the use of HART to change a
device configuration.
• Make sure that the custom data for the device (this is the data that is
provided in response to HART command #03) is used in accordance
with the device manufacturers published recommendations.

Configure HART for Field Device Monitoring

When an analog module is added to the RSLogix™ application, input, output,
and configuration tags for the module are automatically created. The input
tags contain AB:1715_ChHART_Struct substructures for HART data. The
configuration tags contain a HartEn variable that is used to enable HART on
individual channels.

To configure an analog channel to use HART to monitor a field device, HART

must be enabled for the I/O module, and the channel the device is connected
to.

To enable HART, do the following:

1. Double-click the I/O module in the Controller Organizer to display the I/
O module properties. On the General tab, update the Module Definition
to enable HART:

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 141

Chapter 5 Analog I/O Operation

2. Enable HART on the channels to which the devices are connected.

To do this for a 1715-IF16, set the I/O module configuration variable

<AENTR>:<slot>:C.HartEn. For example, enabling HART on all channels
for a module in slot 2.

For a 1715-OF8I, there is a BOOL variable for each channel to enable

HART.

3. Repeat for all I/O modules and channels that you want to monitor.

142 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 5 Analog I/O Operation

AB:1715_ChCHART_Struc

The AB:1715_ChHART_Struc is the substructure within the analog modules

input tag. It is used to contain the HART data from the device.

Identifier Type Description Remarks

HARTPV REAL Variable Primary loop current variable
HARTSV REAL Variable Second loop current variable
HARTTV REAL Variable Third loop current variable
HARTQV REAL Variable Fourth loop current variable
Primary variable status:
PVStatus SINT Status 0x00: Variable is not connected.
0xc0 (decimal -64): Variable is connected.
SVStatus SINT Status Second variable status. Values as for Primary.
TVStatus SINT Status Third variable status. Values as for Primary.
QVStatus SINT Status Forth variable status. Values as for Primary.
Command error summary. If bit 7 is 1, then the remaining bit
indicate communications errors as follows.
Bit 6: vertical parity error.
Bit 5: overrun error.
Bit 4: framing error.
Bit 3: longitudinal parity error.
Bit 2: reserved, set to 0.
Bit 1: buffer overflow.
Bit 0: not used.
CommandStatus SINT Status
If bit 7 is 0, the remaining bits contain a command specific
response code in the range 0 to 127. Some common response codes
are:

0: Success – command completed successfully.

32: Busy – the device is performing a function that cannot be
interrupted by this command.
64: Command not implemented – the device does not support the
command.
Field Device status.
Bit 7: field device malfunction.
Bit 6: configuration changed.
Bit 5: cold start.
FieldStatus SINT Status Bit 4: more status available.
Bit 3: analog output current fixed
Bit 2: analog output saturated
Bit 1: non-primary variable out of limits
Bit 0: primary variable out of limits
Extended field device status.
Bit 7: undefined.
Bit 6: undefined.
Bit 5: undefined.
ExternalDeviceStat SINT Status Bit 4: undefined.
us Bit 3: undefined.
Bit 2: critical power failure.
Bit 1: device variable alert.
Bit 0: maintenance required.
Time, in seconds, that indicates the age of the HART data as
follows:
0…127: Age in seconds of the current data values.
DataAge SINT Time -1: Values uninitialized. No successful read at all. This is the power-
up condition.
-2: Values are > 127 seconds old.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 143

Chapter 5 Analog I/O Operation

HART Pass-Through The HART Pass-Through feature enables using an external asset management
system to manage HART compatible field devices that are connected to a 1715
controller.

HART Pass-Through uses the device type manager (DTM) standard, which is
defined by the HART Communication Foundation, to enable using any asset
management system which using the generic 'Frame' standard. Examples of
compatible tools are the FieldCare application by Endress+Hauser and the
FactoryTalk® AssetCentre software by Rockwell Automation Automation.

Using HART Pass-Through

The Controller tags created when an analog input module (1715-IF16), or analog
output module (1715-OF8I), are added to an application, contain variables to
monitor HART data.

To use HART Pass-Through, you have to install the 1715-DTM software on the
computer that is running the asset management system. You can then enable
and disable the HART Pass-Through capability of the 1715 Adapter.

For an analog module, HART data is available to the application in the ChHart
array element of the modules input tag when the module has HART enabled,
for example:

IMPORTANT HART Pass-Through must be enabled

144 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 5 Analog I/O Operation

Once HART Pass-Through has been enabled, HART device data can be viewed
on the HART Device Info tab of a module’s properties:

HART Pass-Through Features

The support for HART Pass-Through in the 1715 Adapter has these features:
• Pass-Through support for HART standards 5, 6 and 7.
• Support for CIP HART object services 0x4b, 0x5a, 0x5b, 0x5c, 0x5e, 0x5f,
and 0x60.
• Supports the 1715-DTM provided by Rockwell Automation.

Precautions for HART Pass-Through in a Safety System

IMPORTANT If you use HART Pass-Through in a safety system, take these

precautions:
• Observe the precautions in Precautions for HART in a Safety System
• Make sure that HART Pass-Through is enabled only under the control of
the application.
• Make sure that HART Pass-Through is enabled only when necessary.
• Configure the application to generate an alarm if Hart Pass-Through is
enabled on any safety-critical channel of any module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 145

Chapter 5 Analog I/O Operation

Installing the 1715-DTM

The 1715-DTM is the device type manage for the HART Pass-Through feature in
a 1715 system. It must be installed on the Windows® computer that is running
the asset management system. For the PC specification refer to the Preface
chapter, Required Software.

To install the DTM, do the following:

1. Locate setup.exe and run it.
2. If the computer onto which the DTM is being installed does not contain
the Microsoft® packages that are required to support the DTM and the
following screen appears, click Install.

3. Click Next.

146 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 5 Analog I/O Operation

4. Accept the terms of the license agreement and click Next.

5. Fill out the customer information and click Next.

6. Change the destination folder if required and click Next.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 147

Chapter 5 Analog I/O Operation

7. Review the installation settings and click Install.

8. Once the DTM has installed, click Finish.

Updating the Asset Management System DTM Catalogue

Once the DTM is installed, the DTM catalog of the asset management system
must be updated. For example, the FactoryTalk® AssetCentre DTM catalogue is
updated by clicking the Scan Now button on the DTM Catalog dialogue:

148 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 5 Analog I/O Operation

The updated DTM catalog contains the following 3 1715 DTMs:

The purpose and usage of the DTMs is explained in the following sections.

Enable HART Pass-Through in the Controller

The 1715 DTM uses HART Pass-Through to communicate with HART devices.
Before it can do this, HART Pass-Through must be enabled for the 1715, and
HART enabled on the channels that HART devices are connected to.

To enable HART Pass-Through, do the following:

1. Open the RSLogix application that contains the 1715 adapter and its I/O
modules.
2. Enable HART on the I/O modules and channels to which you wish to
perform Pass-Through requests, see previous section on how to do this.
3. Enable HART Pass-Through for the 1715 by setting the output tag
<AENTR>:O.HARTPassThrough:

4. Compile and download the application.

Using FactoryTalk AssetCentre with Analog Modules

To use the DTMs, a DTM network must first be configured in the asset
management system.

Use the FactoryTalk AssetCentre, for example, do the following:

1. Make sure that the DTM catalog is up to date, see previous section on
how to do this.
2. Right click the Host PC icon at the top of the tree and click Add DTM.
3. Select a 1715 EtherNet/IP™ Gateway DTM, click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 149

Chapter 5 Analog I/O Operation

4. Right-click the 1715 EtherNet/IP Gateway DTM that has been added and
click Add DTM.
5. Select a 1715-IF16 or 1715-OF8I, depending on the type of physical I/O
module present.
6. Repeat for each I/O module.

7. Add the HART device DTMs.

a. Right-click an I/O module and select Add DTM.
a. Select the device DTM, and then select the I/O channel to which the
device is connected. The first I/O channel number is 0.

8. Configure the 1715 I/O DTMs before or after adding the device DTMs.

IMPORTANT Device DTMs are provided by the device manufacturer, and require
separate installation, not covered in this guide.

150 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 5 Analog I/O Operation

1715-DTM Configuration

1715 EtherNet/IP Gateway DTM

This DTM does not require configuration.

1715-IF16/OF8I

To configure the 1715-IF16 or 1715-OF8I DTM, follow these steps.

1. If the DTM is online, take it offline by right-clicking the DTM and
selecting Offline.

2. Right-click the I/O DTM and select Configuration.

3. Enter the IP address of the 1715 adapter and select the I/O module slot
position.

The first I/O slot number is 2.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 151

Chapter 5 Analog I/O Operation

4. Click OK.

Either Apply or OK must be clicked for the changes to take effect.

Changes are ignored if Next is clicked its own.

1715-DTM HART Diagnostics

The DTM provides a Diagnostics function that enables you to determine the
state of any HART devices that are connected to a 1715 I/O module. To access
the Diagnostics function using FactoryTalk AssetCentre, do the following:
1. Be sure that the I/O module DTM is online by right-clicking the I/O
module and selecting Online.

152 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 5 Analog I/O Operation

2. Right-click the I/O module and select the Diagnosis function.

3. On the Diagnostics dialog box, click Scan On.

The DTM queries each channel to determine whether a responding

HART device is connected:
• For a channel with a connected device, the device information is
displayed. The DTM refreshes this at intervals that are given by the
Scan Interval.
• If a channel does not have a device that is attached, the DTM
periodically queries the channel to detect a newly connected device.

4. To exit, click Next.

IMPORTANT To use the Diagnostic function, the DTM must be online. Diagnostic
controls are disabled if the DTM is offline when the Diagnostic dialogue
is opened. The online status of the DTM appears at the bottom of the
Diagnostics dialogue box.

IMPORTANT No device DTMs require configuration to use the Diagnostics function.

IMPORTANT The Scan Interval can be reduced, but doing so can help prevent other
clients, for example RSLogix 5000, from communicating with the 1715 to
retrieve HART information.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 153

Chapter 5 Analog I/O Operation

Notes:

154 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 6

Redundant I/O System Configuration

You can configure your 1715 Redundant I/O system by using the software
applications from the Product Compatibility and Download Center at
rok.auto/pcdc. See System Software on page 48.

Before You Begin Before you begin configuring the 1715-AENTR modules in the redundant
chassis, verify that these tasks have been completed:
• Make sure that RSLogix 5000® programming software, version 20 or
later, or Studio 5000® environment, version 21 or later, is installed.
• Make sure that the drivers are installed by using RSLinx® Classic
software, version 2.57 or later.
• Make sure that the firmware is at the latest revision and the software is at
the latest version.
• Make sure that both Add-on Profiles (AOPs) are installed on your system:
- One for the 1715 adapter
- One for the 1715 I/O modules

Install the Software Install the following software:

• Studio 5000 environment, version 21 or later
• RSLinx® Classic software, version 2.57 or later

Install the AOPs You must install two AOPs—one for the adapters, version 2.01.014 or later, and
one for each of the I/O modules, version 3.01.014 or later. The four I/O module
AOPs are contained in one file.

See the latest certifications for software and firmware at

rok.auto/certifications. See the TÜV website at https://www.tuv.com/
landingpage/en/functional-safety-meets-cybersecurity/main-navigation/
functional-safety/ for SIL 2 certification listings.

The AOPs can be found on the Product Compatibility and Download Center at
rok.auto/pcdc.

Once the AOPs are installed on your computer, they can be accessed through
the Logix Designer application.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 155

Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

With the AOPs, you are able to do the following:

• Add and configure the redundant adapter pair.
• Add and configure I/O modules in Simplex mode.
• Add and configure I/O modules in Duplex mode.
• Monitor diagnostics for I/O modules.

To install the AOPs, follow these steps.

IMPORTANT Make sure that any instances the Logix Designer application are shut
down before beginning.

Product Installation To download the AOPs for the 1715 adapter and I/O modules, go to the Product
Compatibility and Download Center at rok.auto/pcdc.

EDS Files

The 1715 modules contain the EDS files for installation into RSLinx® software.
You can right-click the module in RSLinx Classic software and upload the EDS
file into RSLinx Classic software without downloading EDS files.

Follow these steps to upload from RSLinx Classic software.

1. Open RSLinx Classic software.
2. In the RSWho tree, right-click the Ethernet adapter and choose Upload
EDS file from device.

156 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

3. From the pull-down menu, choose Upload EDS file from device.

4. Follow the prompts in the Rockwell Automation EDS Wizard.

In the rare case that you must update an EDS file, you have to go to
Get Support Now to obtain the correct files. Also note that when you download
the EDS files, you see the Chassis EDS files that you do not see if you upload
from the module. These files are necessary for chassis selection choices only in
the Logix Designer application. Keep in mind that these are virtual chassis
product numbers and not literal catalog numbers. See the example in
Figure 62.

Figure 62 - Virtual Chassis File Product Numbers

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 157

Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

Create the Project in Once the AOP is installed, you are ready to create the Logix Designer project.
RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 In this section, you do the following:
Logix Designer • Create a project.
• Configure the 1756 controller in the project.
• Add the 1756-EN2TR module to the project.

Step 1: Create the New Project

1. Launch the application and start a new project for the 1715 Redundant
I/O system.
2. In the application, from the File menu, choose New to open the New
Project dialog box.

The New project dialog box appears.

3. In the New Project dialog box, from the Type pull-down menu, choose
your ControlLogix® controller from the list.

158 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

4. Enter the project filename, select a location to store the project file, and
then click Next.

The previous example shows the 1756-L75 controller in slot 0.

5. Choose the revision, chassis size, slot number, and security authority of
your controller, Then click the Finish button.

You now see the new controller in the I/O Configuration tree of the Controller
Organizer.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 159

Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

Step 2: Configure the Controller in the Project

1. To configure the controller, in the Controller Organizer, from the I/O
Configuration folder, right-click the new controller that you created and
.
choose Properties.

The Controller Properties dialog box appears.

2. In the Controller Properties dialog box, set controller configuration

information for the open project, and when online—for the attached
controller.

The tabs that appear are particular to the type of controller you have
selected.
3. Click OK when you are done configuring each tab for your controller.

For a complete description of each tab and the appropriate configuration

settings, refer to rok.auto/literature and type in the name of your controller
under Keyword search.

160 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

Next, add a communication module to the project to let the chassis

communicate with the 1715 Redundant I/O system. The type of module you add
depends on the needs of your system.

Step 3: Add a 1756-EN2TR Module to the Project

1. In the Logix Designer application project, right-click the 1756 backplane
in the I/O Configuration folder, and choose New Module.

The Select Module dialog box appears.

2. Expand the Communications list, select the 1756-EN2TR module. and

click OK.

The Module Properties dialog box appears.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 161

Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

3. Name the module, enter the IP address, enter the Slot number (we chose
1 for this example).
4. Click Change.
5. Choose your Electronic Keying method, see Electronic Keying on
page 99.
6. Click OK.
7. To complete the configuration of the 1756 Ethernet module, refer to the
EtherNet/IP Network Configuration User Manual,
publication ENET-UM001.

The I/O configuration folder of your project now looks similar to the
following image.

IMPORTANT The previous Controller Organizer tree shows a 1756-EN2TR module. The
1756-EN2TR can be used in star (using only one port), Device Level Ring
(DLR), or linear topologies. You can also use a 1756-EN2T module
instead.

Add the 1715-AENTR Adapter Once the project, controller and Ethernet module are configured, you are ready
to the I/O Configuration Tree to add the 1715 adapter. In this section, you do the following:
• Add the 1715-AENTR adapter to the project.
• Configure the adapter for the EtherNet/IP™ network.

Step 1: Configure the Adapter for the EtherNet/IP Network

Plan IP addresses by doing the following:

• You must use two IP addresses.
• You must know the subnet mask for the Ethernet network the redundant
modules are to operate on.

162 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

Options for Setting the IP Addresses of 1715-AENTR Modules

You can set the IP address of the redundant AENTR modules in the adapter
base by using the following:
• A BOOTP/DHCP utility. A BOOTP/DHCP utility is provided with the
Logix Designer application out of the box. See Step 1: Assign an IP
Address on the BOOTP/DHCP Server on page 104.
• Module Configuration properties that are specified in RSLinx Classic
software, if the modules are already configured.
• Module Properties dialog box that is accessed by using RSLogix 5000
programming software or the Logix Designer application, if the modules
are already configured.

If you are configuring your redundant EtherNet/IP modules by using any

of the software options that are listed previously, see the EtherNet/IP
Network Configuration User Manual, publication ENET-UM001.

EtherNet/IP Network

We recommend that static IP addresses be assigned to EtherNet/IP modules in

Logix 5000 control systems.

We recommend that you do not use dynamic IP addresses because if a power

outage or other network failure occurs, modules with dynamic IP addresses
can be assigned new addresses when the failure is resolved. If the IP addresses
of modules change, you could experience a loss of control or other serious
complications with your system.

However, if you must use the DHCP feature, you can use a Stratix® switch,
which can be configured to provide the same IP address to any given port.

For more information, see the EtherNet/IP Network Devices User Manual,
publication ENET-UM006.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 163

Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

Step 2: Add the 1715-AENTR Adapter to the Project

1. In the Logix Designer project, right-click the Ethernet network icon in
the I/O Configuration folder, and choose New Module.

2. Expand the Communications list, select the 1715-AENTR module, and

click OK.

3. Name the module and enter the IP address.

The Slot numbers for the adapters are always 0 and 1.

164 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

IMPORTANT When using IP address swapping, the same IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address is assigned to both the
partnered EtherNet/IP adapters.
You cannot assign the backup module an IP address; it is automatically assigned the next highest IP address after the
primary’s. The backup module of the pair, is assigned the primary’s, or active module’s, IP address, plus one.
For example, if you assign the IP address of 192.168.1.3 to the primary (active) module, after synchronization, the
secondary EtherNet/IP adapter automatically is assigned IP address 192.168.1.4.
Note: This graphic only is for illustrative purposes. In normal operation, the secondary adapter is not shown in the
RSWho window.

1715-AENTR/A

1715-AENTR/B

4. Click Change and set module parameters.

Table 22 - Module Definition Parameters

Parameters Description
Series Module series letter.
Major: Choose the revision of the module.
Minor: Set the minor revision of the module. This field is enabled while offline, and while in the Program, Remote Program, and Remote Run
Revision modes. It appears dimmed when in Run mode, or when electronic keying is set to Disable Keying.
For SIL 2 applications, choose version 2.01.07 or later for 1715-AENTR modules.
Electronic Keying, see Electronic Keying on page 99.
Electronic Keying
Valid values are Compatible Module (default), Exact Match, or Disable Keying.
Connection Leave as ‘Data’ - Listen Only is not supported.
Redundant Always Yes.
Choose No if SIL 2 operation is not required.
SIL 2 Safety Choose Yes to enable SIL 2 operation. The safety pull-down menu appears only if using AOP version 2.01.007 or later. Two new tabs are
available for SIL 2 configuration if you choose Yes.
Choose the chassis size that you want to use: 5,8,11,14,17,20,23,26.
The chassis size is a function of the number of bases that are installed in your system, which comes in either groups of three slots per base
for I/O bases; and two slots per base for the redundant adapter base.
Chassis Size All slots in the chassis do not have to be populated.
To extend the size of a chassis, its size must be consistent with the number of base slots used. The minimum chassis size is 5 slots, which are
built from one 2-slot adapter base and one 3-slot I/O base.

5. Click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 165

Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

6. Click the Connection tab and set connection parameters.

Table 23 - Connection Tab Parameters

Parameters Description
The Requested Packet Interval (RPI) specifies the rate at which the module and the controller exchange
Requested Packet Interval data to and from each other. The allowable range of the RPI is from 60…750 ms, with a default of 60 ms.
When the specified time frame elapses, the module and the controller produce data for each other.
Check or clear this box to inhibit or uninhibit your connection to the module. Inhibiting the module
causes the connection to the module to be closed.
Inhibit Module When you check this box and go online, the icon representing this module in the controller organizer
displays the Inhibited icon.
Check this box to configure the controller so that failure of the connection to this module causes a
Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode major fault on the controller if the connection for the module fails.
Choose between Unicast and Multicast for EtherNet/IP connections.
Use Unicast Connection over EtherNet/IP Use only Multicast in redundancy applications or else the connection drops upon switchover. Make sure
that the box is unchecked.

166 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

7. Click the Module Info A Tab.

The Module A Info Tab displays module and status information about the
primary adapter, in slot 0 or 1. (During initial setup, the primary adapter is
installed in slot 0. If an IP address swap occurs, the primary adapter is now in
slot 1.)

This tab also lets you reset a module to its power-up state. The information on
this tab is not displayed if you are one of the following:
• Offline
• Currently creating a module
Table 24 - Module Info A Parameters
Parameters Description
Displays the following module information:
• Vendor
• Product Type
Identification • Product Code
• Revision
• Serial Number
• Product Name
Status Major Fault Minor Fault
Major/Minor Fault Displays the fault type Displays the fault type
Internal State Displays the module’s current operational state
Displays a yes or no value, which indicates whether the module has been configured by an owner controller who is connected to it - Once a
Configured module has been configured, it stays configured until the module is reset or power is cycled, even if the owner drops connection to the
module. This information only applies to I/O modules and does not apply to adapters, scanners, bridges, or other communication modules.
Owned Displays a yes or no value indicating whether an owner controller is connected to the module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 167

Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

Table 24 - Module Info A Parameters (Continued)

Parameters Description
Displays If the physical mode is
Agrees with what is specified on the General Tab.
For the Match condition to exist, these must agree:
• Vendor
Module Identity Match
• Module Type (the combination of Product Type and Product Code for a particular
Vendor)
• Major Revision
Mis-match Does not agree with what is specified on the General Tab.
Reset Click Reset to return a module to its power-up state by emulating the cycling of power.
Refresh Module Click Refresh Module to refresh the tab with new data from the module.

8. Click the Module Info B tab.

The Module B Info Tab displays module and status information about the
secondary adapter, in slot 0 or 1. (During initial setup, the secondary
adapter is installed in slot 1. If an IP address swap occurs, the secondary
adapter is now in slot 0.)

This tab also lets you reset a module to its power-up state. The
information on this tab is not displayed if you are one of the following:
• Offline
• Currently creating a module

See Table 24 on page 167.

9. Click the Internet Protocol tab and set IP parameters.

You must be online to configure the Internet Protocol settings.

168 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

Table 25 - Internet Protocol Parameters

Parameters Description
Displays the IP settings Configuration mode of the module.
Click the appropriate button to configure the IP settings:
• Manually configure the IP settings
• Obtain IP settings automatically by using BOOTP
Internet Protocol (IP) Settings • Obtain IP settings automatically by using DHCP
Internet Protocol (IP) Settings controls appear dimmed when:
• Offline
• Online and a module mismatch or communication error occurs
• BOOTP or DHCP is not supported
IP Settings Configuration
Displays the physical IP address of the module or, if you chose to configure the IP settings manually, enter a valid physical module
Physical Module IP Address IP address.
Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask of the module or, if you chose to configure the IP settings manually, enter a valid subnet mask.
Displays the gateway IP address of the module or, if you chose to configure the IP settings manually, enter a valid gateway
Gateway Address address.
Domain Name Displays the domain name of the module or to configure the IP settings manually, enter a valid domain name.
Host Name Displays the host name of the module or enter a valid host name.
Displays the primary DNS server IP address of the module or if you chose to configure the IP settings manually, enter a valid
Primary DNS Server Address primary DNS server address.
Displays the secondary DNS server IP address of the module or if you chose to configure the IP settings manually, enter a valid
Secondary DNS Server Address secondary DNS server address.
This link appears when communication with the module has failed. Click Refresh communication to attempt to restart
Refresh communication communication with the module.
Set Click this button to commit your modifications to the module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 169

Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

10. Click the Port Configuration tab and set port parameters.

Table 26 - Port Configuration Parameters

Parameters Description
Port Displays the name of the port.
Enable Displays the enabled state of the port or check to enable the port.
Link Status Displays the link status of the port as Inactive (port is inactive) or Active (port is active).
Displays the port’s auto-negotiate status.
• Check Auto-Negotiate to enable the module to negotiate the speed and duplex of the port automatically.
Auto-Negotiate • Uncheck Auto-Negotiate to set the speed and duplex of the port manually.
• Auto-Negotiate appears dimmed and checked when the port and duplex of the module cannot be specified manually.
• Auto-Negotiate appears dimmed and unchecked when the module specifies the speed and duplex of the port.
Selected: Displays the selected speed of the port if Auto-Negotiate is unchecked.

Valid speeds are:

Speed • 10 Mbps
• 100 Mbps
Current: Displays the current speed of the port.
Selected: Displays the selected duplex of the port if Auto-Negotiate is unchecked.

Valid duplexes are:

Duplex • Half
• Full

Current: Displays the current duplex of the port.

Use the Port Diagnostics tab to view diagnostic information for the port. Various communications diagnostic information is available. For
Port Diagnostics each physical Ethernet port, this includes link status, duplex setting, speed and auto-negotiation status, and CIP™ diagnostic information.
This link appears when communication with the module has failed. Click Refresh communication to attempt to restart communication with
Refresh communication the module.
After you modify the Auto-Negotiate state of the port, Selected Speed, or Selected Duplex configuration values, a reset module message
displays if the module must be reset before the modifications take effect. Clicking reset module initiates a reset operation on the module,
Set which returns the module to its power-up state by emulating the cycling of power.
The Reset Operation also causes the changes that are made to Auto-Negotiate, Selected Speed, and Selected Duplex to become the current
settings of the port.

170 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

11. Click the Network tab and set network parameters.

Table 27 - Network Parameters

Parameters Description
Displays the current network topology as either:
Network Topology • Linear/Star, or
• Ring
Displays the current network status as:
• Normal
Network Status
• Ring Fault, or
• Unexpected Loop Detected
This link appears when communication with the module has failed. Click Refresh communication to
Refresh communication attempt to restart communication with the module.

12. Click OK.

The I/O Configuration folder of your project now looks similar to this.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 171

Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

Obtaining System Status

There are two ways to access the status of the primary and secondary adapters:
• Via the module properties while online with the application
• Via the tags in the owner controller

Check Adapter Status While Online

To check the status of the primary and secondary adapters while online, follow
these steps.
1. In the application, from the I/O Configuration tree, right-click the 1715
adapter and choose Properties.

The Module Properties dialog box appears.

2. Click the Module Info A or Module Info B tabs to display adapter status
information.

172 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

Check Adapter Status via the Owner Controller Tags

To check the status of the primary and secondary adapters through the owner
controller tags, follow these steps.
1. Go online with the controller.
2. Double-click the Controller Tags folder in the Controller Organizer.

The Controller Tags window appears.

Adapter Status tag

3. Locate the adapter status tag.

The adapter status tag name is followed by ‘:S.’

4. Expand the twisty for the adapter status tag to view the status
information for the primary and secondary adapters.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 173

Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

1715-IB16D Digital Input Add the Digital Input Module to the Project
Module
Once the 1715-AENTR adapter is configured in the project, you are ready to add
I/O modules to the project. In this section, you do the following:
• Add a 1715-IB16D digital input module in Duplex mode to the project.
• Add a 1715-IB16D digital input module in Simplex mode to the project.

Depending on which configuration you choose, you can skip the steps
that do not apply.

Step 1: Add the Digital Input Module in Duplex Mode

1. To add a 1715-IB16D Digital Input module in Duplex mode to the project,
right-click the 1715-AENTR adapter and choose New Module.

The Select Module dialog box appears.

2. Expand the Digital module list, select the 1715-IB16D module, and click
OK.

174 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

3. On the General tab, complete the general parameters.

Table 28 - General Parameters for the Digital Input Module in Duplex Mode
Parameters Description
Type Displays the type and description of the module being created (read-only).
Vendor Displays the vendor of the module being created (read-only).
Parent Displays the name of the parent module (read-only).
Name Enter the name of the module.
Enter a description for the module here, up to 128 characters. You can use any printable
Description character in this field. If you exceed the maximum length, the software ignores any extra
characters.
Slot A Choose the slot number in which the module resides.
When your module is configured for duplex, the slot number in which the redundant module
Slot B resides is displayed. When configured for duplex, the Slot B field is shown for reference
only.
Click Change to access the Module Definition dialog box. From the Module Definition dialog
Change box, you can change the values that define the module definition, Electronic Keying, and
Minor Revision.
4. Click Change.
5. On the Module Definition dialog box, complete the module parameters.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 175

Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

Table 29 - Module Definition Parameters for Digital Input Module Duplex Mode
Parameters Description
Choose the Series of the module.
Series Only the series that the module supports are displayed.
Major: Choose the Revision of the module.
Minor: Sets the minor revision of the module.
Revision The valid range is 1…255. This field is enabled while offline, and while in the Program,
Remote Program, and Remote Run modes.
For SIL 2 applications, choose version 3.01.07 or later for 1715 I/O modules.
Choose the Electronic Keying that you wish to use for the selected module.
Electronic Keying Valid values are Compatible Module (default), Exact Match, or Disable Keying. See Electronic
Keying on page 99.
Connection Leave as ‘Data’ - Listen Only is not supported.
Yes for Duplex mode.
Redundant No for Simplex mode.
Choose No if SIL 2 operation is not required.
Choose Yes to enable SIL 2 operation. The safety pull-down menu appears only if using AOP
SIL 2 Safety version 2.01.007 or later. Two new tabs are available for a SIL 2 configuration if you choose
Yes. For information on SIL 2 configuration, see the Using ControlLogix in SIL 2 Applications
Safety Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM001.
6. Click OK.
7. On the Module Properties dialog box, verify Redundant is Yes for Duplex
mode.

Note the additional module slot on the Module Properties dialog box.

See Online Help in the application for more information on how to set Module
Definition parameters.

176 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

8. Click OK.
9. Click the Connection tab.

See page 166.

10. Click the Module Info A tab.

The Module Info A tab appears.

See page 167 for a definition of parameters on the Module Info A tab.
11. Click the Module Info B tab.

The Module Info B tab appears. You set the parameters for Module B the
same way as Module A. See page 168.
12. Click the Configuration tab.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 177

Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

Table 30 - Configuration Parameters for Duplex Mode

Parameters Description
Point Click the point number to configure parameters for the specified point (0…15).
Check which points trigger production of data on Change of State. If the box is
checked, Change of State is enabled for a particular state transition that by the
Enable Change of State column header indicates. If the box is unchecked, Change of State is disabled.

Enable Change of State appears dimmed only when in Hard Run mode (0…15).
Choose from the following three pre-selected threshold types for each point:
• Full – Thresholds are used that work with the Rockwell Automation preferred end-
of-line devices to support open-wire and short circuit protection and diagnostics.
Diagnostics • None – Thresholds are used that are appropriate for use with no end-of-line device.
This option does not support open-wire and short circuit protection and
diagnostics.
• Custom – You provide the thresholds. The default matches the Full thresholds.
Click Edit to display the Edit Custom Thresholds dialog box and edit thresholds for the
selected point.
When offline or online (including Hard Run mode), the Edit button is enabled when the
Custom Thresholds Custom diagnostics type is selected for a point and dimmed when the Full or None
diagnostic types are selected. When the Custom diagnostic type is selected, the
default matches the Full thresholds.
Select if the thresholds allow for open wire detection (for example, if the threshold 2
value is not 0). By default, the header checkbox is selected and all points (0…15) are
selected. If the header checkbox is cleared, all points (0…15) are cleared.
Open Wire Detection To select open wire detection for a specific point, check the checkbox in the
appropriate row for that point.
To clear open wire detection for a specific point, clear the checkbox in the appropriate
row for that point.
Select if line fault alarms are latched until reset (including Open Wire Detection and
Latch Diagnostics Short Circuit detection). By default, the header checkbox is selected and all points
(0…15) are selected. If the header checkbox is cleared, all points (0…15) are cleared.
Reset Latch Diagnostics Click Reset to reset the diagnostic latch serviced.
Enable Change of State for Select whether Change of State is enabled when any diagnostic event occurs.
Diagnostic Transitions
Full And Custom
Diagnostics Require Use Specifies that a custom end device must be used when using full or custom
Of An Appropriate End-of- diagnostics.
line Device
13. Click OK.

178 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

Step 2: Add the Digital Input Module in Simplex Mode

To add a 1715-IB16D Digital Input module in Simplex mode to the project,

follow these steps.
1. Add the new module, see page 174.
2. Select the 1715-IB16D Digital Input module, see page 174, and click OK.

The General tab appears.

3. Enter the module name.

Notice that there are still two slot numbers that are displayed, indicating
that the module is in the default Duplex mode.
4. Click Change.

The Module Definition dialog box appears.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 179

Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

5. Change the module default from Redundant= Yes to Redundant=No to

run the module in Simplex mode.

See page 175 for more setup information.

6. Click OK.

A Verify Module Properties dialog box appears

.

7. Click Yes.

A new General tab appears in Simplex mode.

Notice there is now only one slot number that is displayed and
Redundant now is ‘No’.

8. Click the Connection tab, see page 166.

9. Click the Module Info tab, see page 167.
10. Click the Configuration tab, see page 177.
11. Click OK.

The I/O Configuration folder of your project now looks similar to this.

180 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

1715-OB8DE Digital Output Add the Digital Output Module to the Project
Module
In this section, you do the following:
• Add a 1715-OB8DE digital output module in Duplex mode to the project.
• Add a 1715-OB8DE digital output module in Simplex mode to the project.

Step 1: Add the Digital Output Module in Duplex Mode

1. To add a new 1715-OB8DE digital output module in Duplex mode to the
project, right-click the 1715-AENTR adapter and choose New Module.

The Select Module dialog box appears.

2. Expand the Digital module list and select the 1715-OB8DE module, and
click OK.

The General tab appears.

3. Enter the parameters.

They are similar to the settings on page 174.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 181

Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

4. Click Change.
5. Enter the parameters, see page 175.
6. Click OK.
7. Click the Connection tab, see page 166.
8. Click the Module Info A tab, see page 167.
9. Click the Module Info B tab, see page 167.
10. Click the Configuration tab.

The Configuration tab appears.

Table 31 - Configuration Parameters for Digital Output Module in Duplex Mode

Parameters Description
Point Click the point number to configure parameters for the specified point (0…7).
By default, the header checkbox is selected and all points (0…7) are selected. If the
header checkbox is cleared, all points (0…7) are cleared.
To specify no load detection for a specific point, check the checkbox in the
No Load Detection appropriate row for that point.
To clear no load detection for a specific point, clear the checkbox in the appropriate
row for that point.
Choose if load fault alarms are latched until reset (including Open Wire Detection and
Short Circuit detection). By default, the header checkbox is selected and all points
(0…7) are selected. If the header checkbox is cleared, all points (0…7) are cleared.
Latch No Load Diagnostics To select load fault alarms are latched until reset for a specific point, check the
checkbox in the appropriate row for that point.
To clear load fault alarms are latched until reset for a specific point, clear the
checkbox in the appropriate row for that point.
Click Reset to reset the diagnostic latch service.
Reset Latched Diagnostics When online and in Program mode, Remote Program mode, Run mode, the Reset
button is enabled for a point. When offline, the Reset button is dimmed for a point.
Click Reset to reset the fuse reset short/overload service.
Reset Fuse When online and in Program mode, Remote Program mode, Run mode, the Reset
button is enabled for a point. When offline, the Reset button is dimmed for all points.

182 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

11. Click the Fault/Program Action tab.

The Fault/Program Action tab appears.

Table 32 - Fault/Program Action Parameters

Parameters Description
Point Click the point number to configure parameters for the specified point (0…7).
This value Indicates the following controller tag settings
• On ProgMode = 0
ProgValue = 1

ProgMode = 0
Program mode • Off ProgValue = 0

ProgMode = 1
Output State During • Hold ProgValue = The value previously set.
• On FaultMode = 0
FaultValue = 1

FaultMode = 0
Fault mode • Off FaultValue = 0

FaultMode = 1
• Hold FaultValue = The value previously set.
Specify the action to take when communication fail in Program mode. Choose one of the following:
• Leave outputs in Program mode state – When selected, lets you maintain outputs in the Program mode
state (default). When cleared, changes outputs to the Fault mode state.
Communication Failure If Communication Fail in Program Mode Leave outputs in Program mode state appears dimmed only when in Hard Run mode.
• Change outputs to Fault mode state – When selected, lets you change outputs to the Fault mode state.
When cleared, changes outputs to the Program mode state.
Change outputs to Fault mode state appears dimmed only when in Hard Run mode.

12. Click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 183

Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

Step 2: Add the Digital Output Module in Simplex Mode

Add a 1715-IB16D Digital Input module in Simplex mode to the project.

1. Add the new module, see page 174.
2. Select the 1715-OB8DE Digital Output module, see page 174, and click OK.

The General tab appears.

3. Enter the module name.

Notice that there are still two slot numbers that are displayed, indicating
that the module is in the default Duplex mode.
4. Click Change, see step 6 and step 7 on page 180, and step 8 on page 180.

A new General tab appears in Simplex mode.

Notice there is now only one slot number available and Redundant is
‘No’, indicating that the module is now in Simplex mode.
5. Click the Connection tab, see page 166.
6. Click the Module Info tab, see page 167.

184 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

7. Click the Configuration tab, see page 182.

8. Click the Fault/Program Action tab, see page 183.
9. Click OK.

The I/O configuration folder of your project now looks similar to this.

1715-IF16 Analog Input Add the Analog Input Module to the Project
Module
In this section, you do the following:
• Add a 1715-IF16 analog input module in Duplex mode to the project.
• Add a 1715-IF16 analog input module in Simplex mode to the project.

Step 1: Add the Analog Input Module in Duplex Mode

Add a 1715-IF16 Analog Input module in Duplex mode to the project.

1. Add the new module, see page 174.

The Select Module dialog box appears.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 185

Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

2. Expand the Analog module list, select the 1715-IF16 module, and click OK.

The General tab appears.

See figure on page 174 for detailed parameter information for the
General tab.
3. Click Change.

The Module Definition dialog box appears.

186 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

Table 33 - Module Definition Parameters for Analog Input Module

Parameters Description
Series Choose the Series of the module.
Choose the Revision of the module.
Revision For SIL 2 applications, choose version 3.01.07 or later for 1715 I/O modules.
Electronic Keying Choose the Electronic Keying that you wish to use for the selected module. See Electronic
Keying on page 99.
Connection Leave as ‘Data’ - Listen Only is not supported.
Input Data Display Only.
Data Format Display Only.
Redundant Yes indicates Duplex mode.
Choose No if SIL 2 operation is not required.
Choose Yes to enable SIL 2 operation. The safety pull-down menu appears only if using AOP
SIL 2 Safety version 2.01.007 or later. Two new tabs are available for SIL 2 configuration if you choose Yes.
For information on SIL 2 configuration, see the Using ControlLogix in SIL 2 Applications Safety
Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM001.
4. Click OK.
5. Click the Connection tab, see page 166.
6. Click the Module Info A tab, see page 167.
7. Click the Module Info B tab, see page 168.
8. Click the Configuration tab.

The Configuration tab appears.

Table 34 - Configuration Parameters for the Analog Input Duplex Module

Parameters Description
Channel Displays the channel number.
Displays the current range (0…20 mA) for the channel.
Current Range This field is read-only.
Enter the Low Signal value for the channel (between 0.0…20.0 mA). The default is
Low Signal 4.0 mA. This value must be less than the High Signal value. Low Signal and Low Engineering
values are shown in pairs.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 187

Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

Table 34 - Configuration Parameters for the Analog Input Duplex Module (Continued)
Parameters Description
Enter the Low Engineering value for the channel (between -9999999…+99999999). The default
Low Engineering is 0.0. Low Signal and Low Engineering values are shown in pairs.
Enter the High Signal value for the channel (between 0.0…20.0 mA). The default is 20.0 mA.
High Signal This value must be greater than the Low Signal value. High Signal and High Engineering values
are shown in pairs.
Enter the High Engineering value for the channel (between -9999999…+99999999). The default
High Engineering is 100.0. High Signal and High Engineering values are shown in pairs.

9. Click OK.

Step 2: Add the Analog Input Module in Simplex Mode

Add a 1715-IF16 Analog Input module in Simplex mode to the project.

1. Add the new module, see page 174.
2. Select the 1715-IF16 module, see step 2 on page 186.

The General tab appears.

See Figure on page 175 for General parameter settings.

3. Click Change.

See Figure on page 186 for Module Definition parameter settings.

4. Change Redundant to No to place the module in Simplex mode.
5. Click OK.

The Verify Module Properties dialog box appears. See page 180.
6. Click Yes.

A new General tab appears showing only one slot as available. The
module is now in Simplex mode.

188 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

7. Click the Connection tab, see page 166.

8. Click the Module Info A tab, see page 167.
9. Click the Configuration tab, see page 187.
10. Click OK.

The I/O configuration folder of your project now looks similar to the
following image.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 189

Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

1715-OF8I Analog Output Add the Analog Output Module to the project
Module
In this section, you do the following:
• Add a 1715-OF8I analog output module in Duplex mode to the project.
• Add a 1715-OF8I analog output module in Simplex mode to the project

Step 1: Add the Analog Output Module in Duplex Mode

1. Add the new module, see page 174.

The Select New Module dialog box appears.

2. Expand the Analog module list, select the 1715-OF8I module, and click
OK.

The General tab appears.

See page 174.

190 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

3. Click Change.
4. Verify that Redundant is Yes.

See page 186.

5. Click OK.
6. Click the Connection tab, see page 166.
7. Click the Module Info A tab, see page 167.
8. Click the Module Info B tab, see page 168.
9. Click the Configuration tab.

The Configuration tab appears.

Table 35 - Analog Output Configuration Parameters Duplex Mode

Parameters Description
Channel Displays the channel number.
Displays the current range (0…20 mA) for the channel.
Current Range This field is read-only.
Check the Low Signal value for the channel (between 0.0…20.0 mA). The default is
Low Signal 4.0 mA. This value must be less than the High Signal value. Low Signal and Low Engineering values are shown in pairs.
Check the Low Engineering value for the channel (between -9999999…+99999999). The default is 0.0. Low Signal and Low Engineering values
Low Engineering are shown in pairs.
Check the High Signal value for the channel (between 0.0…20.0 mA). The default is 20.0 mA. This value must be greater than the Low Signal
High Signal value. High Signal and High Engineering values are shown in pairs.
Check the High Engineering value for the channel (between -9999999…+99999999). The default is 100.0. High Signal and High Engineering
High Engineering values are shown in pairs.
Set the channel to hold, or not change, until initialized with a value within 0.1% of full scale of its current value when one of these conditions
occurs:
Hold for Initialization • Module initial connection (power-up)
• Module transition from Program mode back to Run mode
• Module re-establishes communication after fault.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 191

Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

10. Click the Limits tab.

The Limits Configuration tab appears.

Table 36 - Limits Parameters for Analog Output Duplex Module

Parameters Description
Channel Displays the channel number.
Enter a High Clamp Limit (between -9999999…+99999999). The default is 100.0000. The High Clamp Limit must be greater than the Low
Clamp Limit.
High Clamp Limit Any out of range value causes a profile validation error.
HI appears dimmed only when in Hard Run mode.
Click Unlatch High Clamp Limit to send a message to the module to unlatch a High Limit Alarm (online only).
Unlatch High Clamp Limit Unlatch (High Clamp) is enabled when online (including Hard Run mode) and when Latch Limit Alarms is selected. Unlatch (High Clamp) is
dimmed when offline and online (including Hard Run mode) when Latch Limit Alarms is cleared.
Enter a Low Clamp Limit (between -9999999…+99999999). The default is 0.0000. The Low Clamp Limit must be less than the High Clamp
Limit.
Low Clamp Limit Any out of range value causes a profile validation error.
LO appears dimmed only when in Hard Run mode.
Click Unlatch Low Clamp Limit to send a message to the module to unlatch a Low Limit Alarm (online only).
Unlatch Low Clamp Limit Unlatch (Low Clamp) is enabled when online (including Hard Run mode) and when Latch Limit Alarms is selected. Unlatch (Low Clamp) is
dimmed when offline and online (including Hard Run mode) when Latch Limit Alarms is cleared.
Unlatch All Click Unlatch All to send a message to the module to unlatch all latched alarms (High Limit, Low Limit, and Ramp Alarm).
Check this checkbox to establish whether to limit the rate of change of the output. If selected, then changes due to command values,
Ramp in Run Mode fault actions, and program actions are limited to the specified ramp rate.
Enter the maximum ramp rate for changes in the output value (in seconds). The default is blank, which results in an auditing error. This
Ramp Rate default forces you to enter an appropriate value.
Click Unlatch Ramp Rate to send a message to the module to unlatch based on Ramp Rate.
Unlatch Ramp Rate Unlatch (Ramp Rate) is enabled when online (including Hard Run mode) and when Latch Rate Alarm is selected. Unlatch (Low Clamp) is
dimmed when offline and online (including Hard Run mode) when Latch Rate Alarm is cleared.
Check the checkbox if you do not want to report Latch Limit and Latch Rate Alarms in the input tag. By default, Disable All Alarms is
Disable All Alarms enabled and cleared.
Check the checkbox if you want the High Clamp and Low Clamp Limit Alarms to be latched until a message resets them or by the use of
Latch Limit Alarms a latch reset member of the output tag. By default, Latch Limit Alarms is enabled and cleared.
Check the checkbox if you want the Rate Alarm to be latched until it is reset either by a message or by use of a latch reset member of the
Latch Rate Alarm output tag. By default, Latch Rate Alarm is dimmed and cleared.

IMPORTANT Changing engineering scale values does not automatically adjust the
Alarms/Limits. It is your responsibility to verify/re-adjust the alarm and
limit values.

192 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

11. Click the Fault/Program Action tab.

The Fault/Program Action tab appears.

Table 37 - Fault/Program Action Parameters for Analog Output Duplex Module

Parameters Description
Channel Displays the channel number.
For a channel, choose the behavior of the output channel when a communication fault occurs. Choose between Hold Last State and Use Fault
Fault Mode Value. The default is Hold Last State.
Enter a fault value (between -9999999 and 99999999). The default is 0.0.
Fault Value Fault Value is enabled (excluding Hard Run mode) when the Fault mode is set to Use Fault Value. Fault Value is dimmed (including Hard Run
mode) when the Fault mode is set to Hold Last State.
Check the Ramp to Fault Value checkbox to transition the channel from the current value to the fault value (when in Fault mode and limited by
Ramp Rate). The default is cleared.
Ramp to Fault Value Ramp to Fault Value is enabled (excluding Hard Run mode) when the Fault mode is set to Use Fault Value. Ramp to Fault Value is dimmed
(including Hard Run mode) when the Fault mode is set to Hold Last State.
For a channel, choose the behavior of the output channel when there is a transition to Program mode. Choose between Hold Last State and
Program Mode Use Program Value. The default is Hold Last State.
Enter a program value (between -9999999…+99999999). The default is 0.0.
Program Value Program Value is enabled (excluding Hard Run mode) when the Program mode is set to Use Program Value. Program Value is dimmed
(including Hard Run mode) when the Program mode is set to Hold Last State.
Check the Ramp to Program Value checkbox to transition the channel from the current value to the program value (when in Program mode
and limited by Ramp Rate). The default is cleared.
Ramp to Program Value Ramp to Program Value is enabled (excluding Hard Run mode) when the Program mode is set to Use Program Value. Ramp to Program Value is
dimmed (including Hard Run mode) when the Program mode is set to Hold Last State.
Program Mode
Communication Failure Choose the output state when there is communication failure in Program mode (Program mode or Fault mode). The default is Program mode.
Output State
Displays the Ramp Rate for the channel as it is displayed on the Module Properties dialog box - Limits tab (1715-OF8I). To change this value,
enter a Ramp Rate value on the Module Properties dialog box - Limits tab (1715-OF8I).
Ramp Rate is enabled when online in the following:
Ramp Rate • Program mode
• Remote Program mode
• Remote Run mode

12. Click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 193

Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

Step 2: Add the Analog Output Module in Simplex Mode

1. Add the new module, see page 174.
2. Select the 1715-OF8I Analog Output Module and click OK.

See step 2 on page 190.

The General tab appears.

See figure on page 174 for General parameter settings.

3. Click Change, referring to Figure on page 186 for Module Definition
parameter settings.
4. Change Redundant to No to place the module in Simplex mode.
5. Click OK.

The Verify Module Properties dialog box appears. See page 180.
6. Click Yes.

A new General tab appears showing only one slot as available. The
module is now in Simplex mode.

194 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

7. Click the Connection tab, see page 166.

8. Click the Module Info tab, see page 191.
9. Click the Configuration tab, see page 191.
10. Click the Limits tab, see page 192.
11. Click the Fault/Program Action tab, see page 193.
12. Click OK.

The I/O configuration folder of your project now looks similar to the
following image.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 195

Chapter 6 Redundant I/O System Configuration

Notes:

196 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Chapter 7

Redundant I/O System Diagnostics

Diagnostic Features Many of the diagnostic functions that are associated with an analog module
are provided by proxy by the adapter. These tables summarize the functions
for each module type.
Table 38 - 1715-AENTR Adapter Diagnostic Features
Feature Description
Redundancy level Duplex only.
Redundancy status The status of each module of a duplex pair is available in the input tag.
Various communication diagnostic information is available through the input tag.
For each physical Ethernet port, diagnostics include link status, duplex setting, speed, and auto-negotiation status.
Communication diagnostics For the module, diagnostics include CIP™ on EtherNet/IP™ timeout count, CIP on EtherNet/IP connection count, CIP on
EtherNet/IP network lost packets count, TCP connection count, and CPU utilization.

Table 39 - 1715-IB16D Module Diagnostic Features

Feature Description
Redundancy level Simplex or duplex.
Redundancy status The status of each module of a duplex pair is available in the input tag.
Change of state transport The connection trigger for the discrete modules is change of state.
Points that trigger production The trigger for change of state production is selectable on a point basis for values and on a module basis for diagnostics.
With an appropriate end-of-line device installed and the open wire detection diagnostic enabled, a fault is indicated when an
Open wire detection open wire condition is detected. The fault indication is reset when the open wire condition no longer exists. Open wire
detection can be disabled to help prevent unused points from indicating faults.
With an appropriate end-of-line device installed and the short circuit detection diagnostic enabled, a fault is indicated when a
Short circuit detection short circuit is detected. The fault indication is reset when the short is removed.
Overload protection User-serviceable fuses are included in the termination assembly.
When latching is enabled, diagnostic alarms are latched until they are reset. This aids in detecting intermittent issues. For
Diagnostic latch input modules, latch reset occurs only through messaging.
To allow flexibility in the use and choice of end-of-line devices, you can select the thresholds for detection of inputs, short
Configurable thresholds circuits, and open wires.

Table 40 - 1715-OB8DE Module Diagnostic Features

Feature Description
Redundancy level Simplex or duplex.
Redundancy status The status of each module of a duplex pair is available in the input tag.
The connection trigger for the discrete output is change of state. Data is produced when output data is consumed, or when
Change of state transport diagnostic data changes state, or at the Requested Packet Interval. Unlike the discrete input module, change of state
production cannot be disabled for the discrete output module.
A fault is indicated when no load is detected while the output point is in the off state. No load detection can be disabled to help
No load detection prevent alarms from appearing for unused points.
A fault is indicated when a short circuit/over current condition is detected. The fault indication is reset when the following
occurs.
Short circuit detection 1. Point is commanded off.
2. A short reset service is sent to the module.
3. A reset is done through a bit in the output tag.
When latching is enabled, diagnostic alarms are latched until they are reset. This aids in detecting intermittent issues. For
Diagnostic latch output modules, latch reset can occur either through messaging or through a member of the output tag.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 197

Chapter 7 Redundant I/O System Diagnostics

Table 40 - 1715-OB8DE Module Diagnostic Features (Continued)

Feature Description
When a connection from a controller exists, and the connection is interrupted, the module outputs take on a user-selected
Fault mode state. This Fault mode is either Off, On or Hold Last State.
When a connection from a controller exists, and the controller is not in Run mode, the module outputs take on a user-selected
Program mode state. This Program (a.k.a. ‘Idle’) mode is either Off, On or Hold Last State.
Program to fault enable When enabled, the outputs assume the fault value when a communication fault occurs while in Program mode.
Readback The state of each output point is reflected in the input tag.

Table 41 - 1715-IF16 Module Diagnostic Features

Feature Description
Redundancy level Simplex or duplex.
Redundancy status The status of each module is available in the input tag.
Input range Fixed as 0…20 mA.
Wiring Single-ended only.
Data format Read-only.
Scaling Support choice of signal and engineering range.
Diagnostic alarms are provided when the signal goes above or below what the module can detect. (Zero or less is considered
Underrange overrange underrange.)
Rolling time stamp 1 ms resolution.
Real-time sample rate Fixed RTS.

Table 42 - 1715-OF8I Module Diagnostic Features

Feature Description
Redundancy level Simplex or duplex.
Redundancy status The status of each module is available in the input tag.
Input range Fixed as 0…20 mA.
Scaling Support choice of signal and engineering range.
Readback The state of each output point is reflected in the input tag.
Hold for initialization causes outputs to hold present state until the value that is commanded by the controller matches the
Hold for initialization and enable value at the output screw terminal within 0.1% of full scale, providing a bumpless transfer. A bit in the configuration tag
selects whether Hold For Initialization is used. A bit in the input tag indicates when a channel is holding.
When a connection from a controller exists, and the connection is interrupted, the module outputs take on a user-selected
Fault mode/Fault value state. This Fault mode is either a user-defined value or Hold Last State.
When a connection from a controller exists, and the controller is not in Run mode, the module outputs take on a user-selected
Program module/Program value state. This Program (a.k.a. ‘Idle’) mode is either a user-defined value or Hold Last State.
Enables ramping of the output value during Run mode between the current output level and a newly requested output.
Ramp to run Ramping defines the maximum rate that the output is allowed to transition at, based on the configured rate by the Maximum
Ramp Rate.
Enables ramping to the output value to a user-defined program value. Ramping defines the maximum rate that the output is
Ramp to program allowed to transition based on the configured Maximum Ramp Rate.
Enables ramping of the output value to a user-defined fault value. Ramping defines the maximum rate that the output is
Ramp to fault allowed to transition at based on the configured Maximum Ramp Rate.
A limit on the rate of change of the output, in engineering units (per scaling) per second. The Maximum Ramp Rage applies
Maximum Ramp Rate when any of the Ramp to Run, Ramp to Program, or Ramp to Fault features are enabled.
Ramp rate alarm A diagnostic that is triggered when the rate of change of the output is limited by the Maximum Ramp Rate.
Ramp alarm latch When latching is enabled, the Ramp Rate Alarm is latched and the unit is explicitly reset.
When a Ramp Rate Alarm is latched, a bit in the output image can be used to unlatch the alarm. The unlatch is triggered on a
Ramp alarm unlatch rising edge. If the change in the channel value is still limited by the Maximum Ramp Rate when the latch is attempted, the
alarm remains. (A direct-to-module message can also be used to unlatch an alarm.)
Changing limits the output from the analog module to remain within a range that the controller configures, even when the
Clamp limits/Clamp limit alarms controller commands an output outside that range. When a command value exceeds a clamp limit (either above the High
clamp or below the Low clamp), the output is commanded to the clamp value and an alarm is indicated in the input tag.
Clamp alarm latch When latching is enabled, Clamp Limit Alarms are latched until they are reset. This aids in detecting intermittent issues.
When a clamp alarm is latched, a bit in the output image can be used to unlatch the alarm. The unlatch is triggered on a rising
Clamp alarm unlatch edge. If the point is still clamped when the unlatch is attempted, the clamp and alarm remains. (A direct-to-module message
can also be used to unlatch an alarm.)
Not a number A bit in the input tag indicates when the controller has commanded an output value that is not a number.

198 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Appendix A

Status Indicators

The front panel module status indicators report general status and fault status.
Faults can also be reported via the user application, sourced from system
variables or I/O connection points. Faults are classified as listed here:
• System faults
• Module faults
• Channel faults
• Field faults

Faults Faults are described here.

System Faults

If redundant adapters are fitted, then the Rack status indicator on both
adapters simultaneously turns RED.

A system fault is indicated when a fault is detected on any module (including

the adapter) or any channel. When this type of fault occurs in the system, the
Rack status indicator on the adapters turns red.

Module Faults

A module fault is indicated when a detected fault is isolated to the hardware of

a specific module. The module status indicator turns RED on the faulty module
and then the Rack status indicator on the adapter turns RED.

It is possible during sustained periods of abnormal field voltage and/or

current slewing for channels to be declared faulted as a consequence of
diagnostics that are otherwise designed to verify that the channels are
operating within their designed safety accuracy. For details of slew rate
limitations, refer to the 1715 Redundant I/O System Specifications Technical
Data, publication 1715-TD001.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 199

Appendix A Status Indicators

Channel Faults

A channel fault is indicated when a detected, faulty channel is isolated to a

hardware fault on a specific channel of an I/O module. All channel faults are
also reported as a module fault. This means that the CHANNEL indicator turns
RED, the module status indicator turns RED, and the Rack status indicator on
the adapter also turns RED.

A channel fault on an input module indicates that the channel with the fault no
longer contributes to the reported values. In a dual configuration, as long as
one channel is not faulted, valid data continues to be reported.

If a channel fault on an output module occurs, the channel continues to drive

the output to the best of its ability, in most cases. Otherwise, a fail-safe state
occurs.

In dual configuration, the output values continue as determined by the

adapter as the second module outputs the full current.

It is possible during sustained periods of abnormal field voltage and/or

current slewing for channels to be declared faulted as a consequence of
diagnostics that are otherwise designed to verify that the channels are
operating within their designed safety accuracy. For details of slew rate
limitations, refer to the 1715 Redundant I/O System Specifications Technical
Data, publication 1715-TD001.

Field Faults

A field fault is indicated when a detected fault condition is isolated to a field

condition or field device and the cause is not the hardware that is associated
with the channel or output module. Examples are an open circuit field
connection, no field power, or an out-of-range signal. A CHANNEL indicator
flashing yellow indicates these faults. Steady yellow indicates that the channel
is ON or in range.

User Application Fault Indications and Logging

The information available includes the following:

• Module presence (that is, shutdown or Run modes)
• Module health and status (that is, Module Status or Fault)
• Channel health and status (that is, individual channel Module Status/
fault or field fault)
• An echo of the front panel indicators for each module

200 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Appendix A Status Indicators

Troubleshooting Faults

Follow this troubleshooting procedure to diagnose field faults.

1. Note the affected channel as a field fault can indicate that there is a
blown fuse on an input channel.
2. To find the source of the over voltage that caused the fuse to blow, check
the input field connections to the faulty channel.
3. After you have removed the source of the over voltage, replace the blown
fuse by following these steps.

The fuse can be changed with the termination assembly still installed.
You do not have to remove it.
a. Lift the plastic cover that covers the fuses.
b. Use a fuse removal tool to lever the fuse out of the fuse holder and
replace the fuse.

You can use these types of replacement fuses.

Component Fuse Type

Analog Input Termination Assembly Littelfuse No. 396/TE5 50 mA time lag fuse; UL 248-14, 125V, T Leadfree
Digital Input Termination Assembly Littelfuse No. 396/TE5 50 mA time lag fuse; UL 248-14, 125V, T Leadfree
Littelfuse Type 451 Omni-Blok 10 A, 125V fast acting fuse.
Digital Output Termination Assembly Surface mount fuse block 154 010.
c. Close the plastic cover.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 201

Appendix A Status Indicators

1715 Adapter The adapter has these status indicators.

ADAPTER
1715-AENTR

A Module Status
B Redundancy Status
C Network Status
D Rack Status

E Ethernet 1
Ethernet 2

F Reset

Indicator Description
A Module Status
B Redundancy Status
C Network Status
D Rack Status
E Ethernet 1 & 2
F Reset

Status indicators for the 1715-AENTR adapter are shown in this table.
Table 43 - Adapter Status Indicators
Indicator State Description
Steady off No power - There is no power to the module.
Steady green Module operational - The module has been configured without any faults.
Flashing green Standby - The module has not been configured.
Flashing red (with steady red for network status) An address conflict has been detected.
Flashing red (with flashing green for network status) Module firmware is being updated with ControlFLASH™
Module Status
Flashing red (with NOT steady red and NOT flashing Recoverable fault detected.
green for network status)
Steady red Major fault - The module has detected a nonrecoverable fault.
Flashing green/red Self-test - The module is performing its power on self tests.
Flashing yellow Unlocked - The adapter is unlocked from a previously locked state.

202 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Appendix A Status Indicators

Table 43 - Adapter Status Indicators (Continued)

Indicator State Description
No power, unlocked, or no partner - The module is not locked (via the locking
Steady off screw), or no partner module is present.
Synchronized - The module is synchronized with the partner module (redundant
Steady green operation).
Partner detected, synchronizing - The partner module has been detected and is
Redundancy Status Flashing green synchronizing with its partner module in preparation for redundant operation.
Synchronization fault - The partner module is present, but unable to synchronize
Steady red (no redundant operation).
Flashing green/red Self-test - The module is performing its power on self tests.
Flashing yellow Unlocked - The adapter is unlocked from a previously locked state.
No power, unlocked, no IP address - The module has no power, or the module is not
Steady off locked (via the locking screw), or no IP address has been assigned or obtained.
Connected - The module has at least one established connection (either to itself or
Steady green to an I/O module).
No connections - The module has an IP address, but there are no established
Flashing green connections (either to itself or an I/O module).
Network Status Connection timeout - One or more of the connections (either to itself or to an I/O
Flashing red module) has timed out.
Steady red Duplicate IP - The module has detected that its IP address is already in use.
Steady red (with flashing red for module status) An address conflict has been detected.
Flashing green/red Self-test - The module is performing its power on self tests.
Flashing yellow Unlocked - The adapter is unlocked from a previously locked state.
No power, unlocked - The module has no power or it is not locked (via the locking
Steady off screw).
Steady green Rack operational - All modules in the rack are operating without fault.
Rack Status Steady red Fault - At least one module in the rack has detected a fault. Examine the other
modules in the rack for their status indicator condition.
Flashing green/red Self-test - The module is performing its power on self tests.
Flashing yellow Unlocked - The adapter is unlocked from a previously locked state.
Unlabeled Status 1 Steady off No power - The module has no power or is not in recovery mode.
Located directly below Rack Steady yellow Recovery mode - The module is in Recovery mode.
Status-used in Recovery mode Flashing yellow Unlocked - The adapter is unlocked from a previously locked state.
Unlabeled Status 2 Steady off No power - The module has no power or is not in recovery mode.
Located directly below Steady yellow Recovery mode - The module is in Recovery mode.
Unlabeled Status 1-used in
Recovery mode Flashing yellow Unlocked - The adapter is unlocked from a previously locked state.
Steady off No power, no link - There is no power or an Ethernet link is not established.
Ethernet 1 and 2 Steady green Link present - A valid Ethernet link has been established.
Amber Activity - Tx and/or Rx activity is present.

Reset Button

The reset button does the following three functions:

• Firmware recovery: Press the Reset button while cycling power if
communication during a firmware update is interrupted and the module
becomes inoperable. Cycle power to the module while pressing the
button. This places the adapter in Safe mode so that you can update it.
• Recover a lost IP address: Press and hold the Reset button while cycling
power. This places the module in Safe mode. Cycle power again without
holding the Reset button. This re-enables BOOTP mode. The adapter
requests a new IP address.
• Fault reset: Certain faults on an I/O module require a hard reset.
Pressing the Reset button during operation resets the fault.

Repeat the above steps to install the redundant adapter.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 203
Appendix A Status Indicators

1715 Digital Input Module The digital input module has these status indicators.

DIGITAL INPUT
1715-IB16D

A
Healthy
B
C Ready
D Run
Channel 00
Channel 01
Channel 02
Channel 03
Channel 04
Channel 05
Channel 06
Channel 07

Channel 08
Channel 09
Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12
Channel 13
Channel 14
Channel 15

Indicator Description
A Healthy - general status display
B Ready - redundancy status indicator
C Run - network status indicator
D Channel 0…7, 8…15 - channel status indicators

Status indicators for the 1715-IB16D digital input module are shown in this
table.

Table 44 - Digital Input Module Status Indicators

Indicator State Description
Steady off No power.
Module operational - The module has been configured and is operating
Steady green
Healthy without any faults.
Flashing green Standby - The module has not been configured.
Steady red Fault - A fault has been detected on the module.
Steady off No power or no partner module present.
Ready Synchronized - Synchronized with partner module; redundant
Steady green operation.

204 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Appendix A Status Indicators

Table 44 - Digital Input Module Status Indicators (Continued)

Indicator State Description
No power; no backplane communication - No power or the module is
Steady off not communicating over the backplane.
Run Steady green Connected - The module has at least one established connection.
No connections - The module is communicating over the backplane,
Flashing green but there are no established connections.
Off/de-energized, no backplane communication - The channel is off/
Steady off de-energized or the module is not communicating over the I/O
backplane.
Channel 0…7, 8…15 Steady yellow On/energized - The channel is on/energized.
Flashing yellow Field fault - A field fault has been detected on this channel.
Steady red Fault - A fault has been detected on this channel.

1715 Digital Output Module The digital output module has these status indicators.

DIGITAL OUTPUT
1715-OB8DE

A
Healthy
B
C Ready
D Run
Channel 00
Channel 01
Channel 02
Channel 03
Channel 04
Channel 05
Channel 06
Channel 07

Indicator Description
A Healthy - general status display
B Ready - redundancy status indicator
C Run- network status indicator
D Channel 0…7 - channel status indicators

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 205

Appendix A Status Indicators

Status indicators for the 1715-OB8DE digital output module are shown in this
table.

Table 45 - Digital Output Module Status Indicators

Indicator State Description
Steady off No power.
Module operational - The module has been configured and is operating
Steady green
Healthy without any faults.
Flashing green Standby - The module has not been configured.
Steady red Fault - A fault has been detected on this module.
Steady off No power or no partner module present.
Ready Synchronized - Synchronized with partner module; redundant
Steady green operation.
No power; no backplane communication - No power or the module is
Steady off not communicating over the backplane.
Run Steady green Connected - The module has at least one established connection.
No connections - The module is communicating over the backplane, but
Flashing green there are no established connections.
Steady off Off/de-energized - The channel is off/de-energized.
Steady yellow On/energized - The channel is on/energized.
Channel 0…7
Flashing yellow Field fault - A field fault has been detected on this channel.
Steady red Fault - A fault has been detected on this channel.

206 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Appendix A Status Indicators

1715 Analog Input Module The digital output module has these status indicators.

ANALOG INPUT
1715-IF16

A
Healthy
B
C Ready
D Run
Channel 00
Channel 01
Channel 02
Channel 03
Channel 04
Channel 05
Channel 06
Channel 07

Channel 08
Channel 09
Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12
Channel 13
Channel 14
Channel 15

Indicator Description
A Healthy - general status display
B Ready-redundancy status indicator
C Run- network status indicator
D Channel 0…7, 8…15 - channel status indicators

Status indicators for the 1715-IF16 analog input module are shown in this table.

Table 46 - Analog Input Module Status Indicators

Indicator State Description
Steady off No power.
Module operational - The module has been configured and is
Steady green
Healthy operating without any faults.
Flashing green Standby - The module has not been configured.
Steady red Fault - A fault has been detected on the module.
Steady off No power or no partner module present.
Ready Synchronized - Synchronized with partner module; redundant
Steady green operation.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 207

Appendix A Status Indicators

Table 46 - Analog Input Module Status Indicators (Continued)

Indicator State Description
No power; no backplane communication - No power or the module is
Steady off not communicating over the backplane.
Run Steady green Connected - The module has at least one established connection.
No connections - The module is communicating over the backplane,
Flashing green but there are no established connections.
No signal, no backplane communication - There is no signal on the
Steady off channel or the module is not communicating over the I/O backplane.
Signal present - A valid signal has been detected (that is, measured
Channel 0…7, 8…15 Steady yellow signal >= 0.4 mA).
Flashing yellow Field fault - A field fault has been detected on this channel.
Steady red Fault - A fault has been detected on this channel.

1715 Analog Output Module The analog output module has these status indicators.

ANALOG OUTPUT
1715-OF8I

A Healthy
B
Ready
C
Run
D
Channel 00
Channel 01
Channel 02
Channel 03
Channel 04
Channel 05
Channel 06
Channel 07

Indicator Description
A Healthy - general status display
B Ready - redundancy status indicator
C Run - network status indicator
D Channel 0…7 - channel status indicators

208 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Appendix A Status Indicators

Status indicators for the 1715-OF8I analog output module are shown in this
table.

Table 47 - Analog Output Module Status Indicators

Indicator State Description
Steady off No power.
Module operational - The module has been configured and is
Steady green
Healthy operating without any faults.
Flashing green Standby - The module has not been configured.
Steady red Fault - A fault has been detected on the module.
Steady off No power or no partner module present.
Ready Synchronized - Synchronized with partner module; redundant
Steady green operation.
No power; no backplane communication - No power or the
Steady off module is not communicating over the backplane.
Connected - The module has at least one established
Run Steady green connection.
No connections - The module is communicating over the
Flashing green backplane, but there are no established connections.
Off/de-energized - The channel is not being driven (output
Steady off current < 0.4 mA).
On/energized - The channel is being driven (output current is
Channel 0…7 Steady yellow >= 0.4 mA).
Flashing yellow Field fault - A field fault has been detected on this channel.
Steady red Fault - A fault has been detected on this channel.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 209

Appendix A Status Indicators

Notes:

210 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Appendix B

1715-IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics

Threshold Values for This section describes how to calculate and set threshold values for digital
Digital Inputs inputs.

The module determines the channel state and the line fault status by
comparing the channel input voltage with defined threshold values. Line
faults, such as short circuit and wire off, can be determined by using different
input voltage values.

With this module, you can define custom threshold values or use a set of preset
default values. The types of threshold values you choose initially for the module
become inherent in each channel; you can define different thresholds for
individual channels later.

The threshold values determine which end-of-line (EOL) resistor value that you
choose, and vice versa, depending on whether you choose the threshold values
first, or the EOL resistor values first.

By considering these two components—EOL resistor values and the threshold

values, we can arrive at the diagnostic settings for the module.

Figure 63 - Common EOL Device Scenario

Term
As

R1
4

R2
5

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 211

Appendix B 1715-IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics

Figure 64 - Threshold Settings

Short
Circuit

On

On

Indeterminate Off

Off

Open
Wire

Threshold Diagnostics Settings

There are three types of threshold diagnostics settings to choose from in the
Logix Designer application:
• Full Diagnostics Configuration
• None Diagnostics Configuration
• Custom Diagnostics Configuration

212 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Appendix B 1715-IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics

Full Diagnostics Configuration

To load a set of threshold default values into the threshold settings, select Full
from the Diagnostics pull-down menu. If an EOL is used, you must select Full.

Figure 65 - Full Diagnostics Threshold Default Values

For a full-diagnostics setting configuration, use these resistor values.

IMPORTANT These are the most common commercially available EOL devices.

Table 48 - Full Diagnostics Resistor Values

Item Value
R1 15 k (1%) - power 0.5 W (max power dissipated 0.128 W)
R2 3.9 k(1%) - power 0.5 W (max power dissipated 0.128 W)
Loop supply voltage = 24V DC (±10%)

None Diagnostics Configuration

To load another set of default values into the threshold settings, select None
from the Diagnostics pull-down menu. Select None when no EOL devices are
used.

Figure 66 - None Diagnostics Threshold Default Values

Below 5.5V
Causes An ‘Off’
Condition

Indicates An
‘On’ Condition

Based on these settings, if the switch is closed, the input reports an ‘on’
condition anytime the voltage is above ~14.5V, but does not report a short
circuit, because there is no way to get the voltage to rise to 32V.

The same is true with an ‘off’ condition. The module reports an ‘off’ condition
anytime the voltage is below ~5.5V, but does not report a wire off, because it
has to go below 0V to do so.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 213

Appendix B 1715-IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics

Custom Diagnostics Configuration

For custom diagnostics, you calculate and enter the threshold values.

To calculate the desired values, see Calculate Threshold and Resistor Values on
page 215.

Once calculated, follow these steps to enter the settings.

1. From the Diagnostics pull-down menu, choose Custom.
2. Click Edit from the Custom Thresholds column.

3. Enter the desired value ranges into the Threshold dialog boxes.

214 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Appendix B 1715-IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics

Calculate Threshold and To arrive at the correct diagnostic settings, you must know one of the two
Resistor Values values—either the threshold values or the resistor values, and then calculate
the other set of values from the known values.

The following example shows a typical EOL arrangement for an Emergency

Shutdown Device.

Figure 67 - Field Loop Circuit for Line Monitored Digital Input for Emergency Shutdown Systems (ESD)
+24V DC

Termination
Assembly

R1
4.99kΩ

R2
50 mA

100Ω
Shield
(if used)

20Ω
Terminal
Blocks
45678

OV

You must realize that by virtue of R1 and R2, in combination with the internal
impedance and field switch position of the module, various voltage levels are
produced at the input terminal that the threshold values can characterize.

Knowing the resistor values allows you to calculate the voltage levels to arrive
at the threshold settings.

Use Figure 68 and Figure 69, and the resistor values you choose. to determine
how the system responds to various field wiring conditions, so that the
threshold values can be set. For our example, we used the resistor values in
Table 48 on page 213.

Calculate the Voltage for Off/On Conditions for Threshold Values

The following examples calculate the voltage for an Off condition with the
switch opened and closed.

Open Switch/Off Condition

With SW1 open, current flows through R1 and R2 (15 + 3.9 k18.9 k. We can
calculate the voltage that is present at the input of the input module and by
using a voltage divider circuit, we can calculate the voltage for an Off
condition.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 215

Appendix B 1715-IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics

Figure 68 - Open Switch/Off Condition

User-calculated Voltage

+24V DC

15 k
Termination
Assembly

SW1 R1 5.1 K
4.99kΩ

3.9 k R2
50 mA

100Ω
Shield
(if used)

20Ω
Terminal
Blocks

OV

45680

If 5.1V is present, you know that the switch is in the Off position. You can enter
a range into the threshold that lets 5.1V be an Off condition. This example uses
3.0…6.5V as the range. If the voltage drops below 3.0V, it is considered a wire-
off. If it goes above 6.5V, it is considered indeterminate.

216 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Appendix B 1715-IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics

6.5
6.0

5.1V Falls Within

the Range
3.5
3.0

Closed Switch/On Condition

If SW1 is closed, then current only flows through R2. To calculate the voltage
present at the input module, use the R2 value of 3.9 kRtotal

Figure 69 - Closed Switch/On Condition

Solution For Voltage

+24V DC

15 k
Termination
Assembly
SW1 R1
4.99kΩ 5.1 k

3.9 k R2
50 mA

100Ω
Shield
(if used)

20Ω
Terminal
Blocks

OV

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 217

Appendix B 1715-IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics

Solution For Voltage

If 13.6V is present, the switch is in the On position. A range can be entered into
the threshold value that lets 13.6V be an On condition. This example uses
19…10.5V as the range. If the voltage drops below 10.5V, it is indeterminate and
if it goes above 19V, it is a short circuit.

19
18.5

13.6V falls within range.

11
10.5

218 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Appendix B 1715-IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics

Calculate On/Off Condition for Resistor Values

If a threshold value is set and you want to figure out which resistors to use,
follow these examples.

On Condition

For an On condition, use the following formulas.

In this case, the module load is 5.1 kand the supply voltage is assumed to be
24V DC. For this example, use Figure 70 and choose 13V DC because it is a value
within the range in the threshold tables.

Figure 70 - On Condition

+24V DC

Termination
Assembly

SW1 R1 5.1 k

4.99kΩ Module
Resistance
R2
50 mA

100Ω
Shield
(if used)

20Ω
Terminal
Blocks

OV

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 219

Appendix B 1715-IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics

4.3 kis a close standard value, so this example uses 3.9 kwhich changes the
voltage slightly but not enough to cause the range to change.

Off Condition

For an Off condition, you must add a resistor to the formula. The R2 is 3.9 k
so you can use that, too.

5V DC
+24V DC

Termination
Assembly

SW1 R1 5.1 k
4.99kΩ

3.9 k R2
50 mA

100Ω
Shield
(if used)

20Ω
Terminal
Blocks 45678

OV

220 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Appendix B 1715-IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics

In this example, 15.4 kis a close standard value, so use 15 k, which changes
the voltage slightly, but not enough to make us change our range.

Calibration Drift Checks The 1715 I/O analog modules are calibrated at the factory with a default
calibration. As time passes, the electrical specifications of various electronic
components of your analog module drift.

To make sure the best possible accuracy in measurements that your analog
input module makes and signals that your analog output module generates are
maintained, it is recommended to perform a calibration drift check every 2
years for most applications.

Although the purpose of checking the calibration of analog modules is the

same for input and output modules, to verify that the accuracy and
repeatability of the module is maintained, the procedures that are involved
differ per module.

When you check the calibration of input modules, you use current, voltage, or
ohms calibrators to send a signal to the module and check that the correct
values are reported.

When you calibrate output modules, you use a digital multimeter (DMM) to
measure the signal that the module is sending out.

IMPORTANT Before you check calibration, do the following:

• Stop the process that your output module is controlling or your input
module is tracking.
• Disconnect input signals and connect test signals. Any control that
depends on the normal input signals does not have them during the
calibration check process.
• Disconnect output signals and connect a suitable measuring instrument.
Any control that depends on the outputs from this module does not have
them during the calibration check process.
• Make sure the equipment, a Multimeter, is calibrated.

The calibration drift process can impair control.

When you begin the calibration check process, if a real-time connection is

open, the module points you are calibrating can fault. We recommend that you
change your controller to Program mode before you begin calibration.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 221

Appendix B 1715-IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics

IMPORTANT The 1715-IF16 and 1715-OF8 modules can be operated with multiple
ranges. Verify that the appropriate Output Range or Input Range is
selected before continuing with the calibration check procedure.

The two general functions in the calibration check process are as follows:
• Attaching/generating a Low Reference Signal
• Attaching/generating a High Reference Signal

Verify that the physical values correspond to the module read/produced values
within desired tolerances. If not, consider replacement of the affected module.

222 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Appendix C

Reconfigure a Module Online

Use Ladder Logic to If an I/O module supports reconfiguration, you can reconfigure the module via
Reconfigure an I/O Module one of the following:
• Studio 5000 Logix Designer® application
• An MSG instruction in program logic

IMPORTANT Consider these guidelines in SIL 2 applications:

• We recommend configuring SIL 2 safety applications offline. Even if the
Logix controller and RSLogix 5000® software permit online SIL 2
configuration (that is, module interface option changes, import of the
Add-On Instructions, and so forth.) a download to the processor is
required.
• Enabling SIL 2 on spare modules while online is not supported.
• Where a module is used without SIL 2 enabled and SIL 2 is then enabled
for that module, a power cycle of the rack is required to force the new
configuration to the module. The same is true where a module is used
with SIL 2 enabled, and SIL 2 is then disabled for that module.
• A programming terminal is not normally connected.

ATTENTION: Use care when changing the configuration of an I/O module. You
could inadvertently cause the I/O module to operate incorrectly.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 223

Appendix C Reconfigure a Module Online

Reconfigure a Module via Studio 5000 Logix Designer Application

To reconfigure a module, perform this procedure.

1. In the Logix Designer application, right-click a module in the I/O
Configuration tree and choose Properties.

The Module Properties dialog box appears.

2. Reconfigure the I/O module.

3. Click OK.

224 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Appendix C Reconfigure a Module Online

Reconfigure a Module Via Ladder Logic

It is sometimes advantageous to change the functional operation of a module

in the ControlLogix® system automatically via the user program instead of by
using the Logix Designer application to reconfigure it. This way, changes in
the process can dictate when the reconfiguration takes place rather than you
performing that function manually.

The1715 modules support sending an MSG instruction of type Module

Reconfigure. This MSG instruction can be sent to a module to reconfigure it
without stopping the module.

Use an MSG instruction of type Module Reconfigure to send new

configuration information to an I/O module. During the reconfiguration, the
following occurs:
• Input modules continue to send input data to the controller.
• Output modules continue to control their output devices.

The following steps are used in this example when reconfiguring a module via
ladder logic.
1. Move new configuration parameters to the Configuration portion of the
tag structure that is associated with the module.
2. Use a message instruction to send a Reconfigure Module service to the
same module.

Before the new configuration parameters are sent to the module, you must
make sure that their relationship to each other is in a format the module
accepts and that the values are within the range the module accepts, otherwise
the module can fault, or the reconfiguration attempt can fail.

IMPORTANT Reconfiguring analog modules via ladder logic can be limited to

functions that involve only the changing of values. We do not
recommend that you enable or disable features via ladder logic. Use the
Logix Designer application to enable or disable these features.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 225

Appendix C Reconfigure a Module Online

Notes:

226 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Appendix D

I/O Tag Definitions

1715-AENTR Adapter This section describes the tags that are associated with the 1715-AENTR
adapter.
Table 49 - Input
Tag Name Data Type Definition
Adapter fault bit: 0 when at least one adapter is present and reporting valid data, OxFFF_FFFF when no
Fault DINT, Binary adapters are present, no Logix connection exits, or reported data is invalid.
Adapter redundancy and power status:
Bit 0: ModAFault 0 = good
1 = fault or module not present
Bit 1: ModBFault 0 = good
Status DINT, bit field 1 = fault or module not present
Bit 8: Power1Fault 0 = good
1 = fault or module not present
Bit 9: Power2Fault 0 = good
1 = fault or module not present
Adapter Ethernet port status:
Bit 0: PortA1Connected 0= Inactive
1 = Active
Bit 2: PortA2Connected 0= Inactive
LinkStatus DINT, bit-field 1 = Active
Bit 3: PortB1Connected 0= Inactive
1 = Active
Bit 4: PortB2Connected 0= Inactive
1 = Active
FullDuplex DINT, bit-field Adapter Ethernet port half/full duplex status:
Bit 0: PortA1FullDuplex 0= Inactive
1 = Active
Bit 2: PortA2Duplex 0= Inactive
1 = Active
Bit 3: PortB1Duplex 0= Inactive
1 = Active
Bit 4: PortB2Duplex 0= Inactive
1 = Active

PortA1ANSTatus SINT, enumerated Enumerated adapter Ethernet port auto-negotiation status:

Value Description
0 Auto-negotiation in progress
Auto-negotiation of duplex and speed detection failed; by using a default value for
1 speed and duplex
2 Auto-negotiation of duplex but detected speed; by using a default value for duplex
3 Successfully negotiated duplex and speed
4 Auto-negotiation not attempted, by using forced speed and duplex values
5-255 Undefined

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 227

Appendix D I/O Tag Definitions

Table 49 - Input (Continued)

Tag Name Data Type Definition
PortA2ANStatus SINT, enumerated Enumerated adapter Ethernet port auto-negotiation status:
Value Description
0 Auto-negotiation in progress
Auto-negotiation of duplex and speed detection failed; by using a default value for
1 speed and duplex
2 Auto-negotiation of duplex but detected speed; by using a default value for duplex
3 Successfully negotiated duplex and speed
4 Auto-negotiation not attempted, by using forced speed and duplex values
5-255 Undefined
PortB1ANStatus SINT, enumerated Enumerated adapter Ethernet port auto-negotiation status:
Value Description
0 Auto-negotiation in progress
Auto-negotiation of duplex and speed detection failed; by using a default value for
1 speed and duplex
2 Auto-negotiation of duplex but detected speed; by using a default value for duplex
3 Successfully negotiated duplex and speed
4 Auto-negotiation not attempted, by using forced speed and duplex values
5-255 Undefined
PortB2ANStatus SINT, enumerated Enumerated adapter Ethernet port auto-negotiation status:
Value Description
0 Auto-negotiation in progress
Auto-negotiation of duplex and speed detection failed; by using a default value for
1 speed and duplex
2 Auto-negotiation of duplex but detected speed; by using a default value for duplex
3 Successfully negotiated duplex and speed
4 Auto-negotiation not attempted, by using forced speed and duplex values
5-255 Undefined
PortA1Speed DINT Interface speed in Mbps that is in use, for example, 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps, or 0 when the port is active
PortA2Speed DINT Interface speed in Mbps that is in use, for example, 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps, or 0 when the port is active
PortB1Speed DINT Interface speed in Mbps that is in use, for example, 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps, or 0 when the port is active
PortB2Speed DINT Interface speed in Mbps that is in use, for example, 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps, or 0 when the port is active
CIPTimeouts DINT Total of all Connection Manager object Connection Timeout values
CIPConnections DINT Total number of active CIP™ connections
CIPLostPackets DINT Total of all CIP packets
TCP Connections DINT Total of all TCP connections
CUPUtilization DINT Echo of Connection Manager object CPU_Utilization attribute

228 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Appendix D I/O Tag Definitions

1715-IB16D This section describes the tags that are associated with the 1715-IB16D module.

Table 50 - 16-channel Digital Input, Simplex

Tag Name Data Type Definition
0 when a module is present and reporting valid data, OxFFF_FFFF when no module
Fault DINT, Binary Module fault bit: is present, no Logix connection exists, or reported data is valid
Data INT Input state, 1 bit per channel for channels 0…15:
0 = Off/de-energized
1 = On, energized
Status DINT, bit-field Redundancy and power status:
Bit Name Description
8 GroupFault 0 = Good
1 = Any channel or module faulted/failed
PtFault INT Channel fault status; 1 bit per channel for channels 0…15:
0 = Normal
1 = Channel is faulted/failed
Open Wire INT Open wire diagnostic status; 1 bit per channel for channels 0…15:
0 = Normal
1 = Indicates open wire detected
ShortCircuit INT Short circuit diagnostic status; 1 bit per channel for channels 0 …15:
0 = Normal
1 = Indicates short circuit detected
Indeterminate INT Indeterminate diagnostic status; one channel per channel for channels 0…15:
0 = Normal
1 = Indicates indeterminate input voltage detected
One element per channel.
NB each timestamp is equivalent DINT[2] representing a 64-bit value (number of
Timestamps AB:1715:TIMESTAMP[16] TIMESTAMP array microseconds since 1st January 1970). An Add-On Instruction
‘SystemTime_64bit_Interpreted’ is available to convert such time stamps to a more
manageable format with individual values for Day, month, year and so on.

Table 51 - 16-channel Digital Input, Duplex

Tag Name Data Type Definition
0 when one module is present and reporting valid data, OxFFF_FFFF when no
Fault DINT, Binary Module fault bit: modules are present, no Logix connection exists, or reported data is invalid.
Data INT Input state, 1 bit per channel for channels 0…15:
0 = Off/de-energized
1 = On, energized
Status DINT, bit-field Redundancy and power status:
Bit Name Description
0 ModAFault 0 = Good
1 = Fault or module not present
1 ModBFault 0 = Good
1 = Fault or module not present
8 GroupFault 0 = Good
1 = Any channel or module faulted/failed
9 ModAGroupFault 0 = Good
1 = Any channel or module A faulted/failed
10 ModBGroupFault 0 = Good
1 = Any channel or Module B faulted/failed
PtFault INT Channel fault status; 1 bit per channel for channels 0…15:
0 = Normal
1 = Channel is faulted/failed

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 229

Appendix D I/O Tag Definitions

Table 51 - 16-channel Digital Input, Duplex (Continued)

Tag Name Data Type Definition
Open Wire INT Open wire diagnostic status; 1 bit per channel for channels 0…15:
0 = Normal
1 = Indicates open wire detected
ShortCircuit INT Short circuit diagnostic status; 1 bit per channel for channels 0…15:
0 = Normal
1 = Indicates short circuit detected
Indeterminate INT Indeterminate diagnostic status; one channel per channel for channels 0…15:
0 = Normal
1 = Indicates indeterminate input voltage detected
One element per channel.
NB each time stamp is equivalent DINT[2] representing a 64-bit value (number of
Timestamps AB:1715:TIMESTAMP[16] TIMESTAMP array microseconds since 1st January 1970). An Add-On Instruction
‘SystemTime_64bit_Interpreted’ is available to convert such time stamps to a more
manageable format with individual values for Day, month, year and so on.

1715-OB8DE This section describes the tags that are associated with the 1715-OB8DE
module.
Table 52 - 8-channel Digital Output, Simplex, Output
Tag Name Data Type Definition
Data SINT Output channel commanded data; 1 bit per channel for channels 0…7:
0 = Off/de-energize
1 = On/energize
AlarmUnlatch SINT Unlatch alarm; 1 bit per channel for channels 0…7; rising edge transition (that is, 0>1)
ResetBlownFuse SINT Reset blown electronic fuse, 1 bit per channel for channels 0…7; rising edge transition (that is, 0>1) resets

Table 53 - 8-channel Digital Output, Simplex, Input

Tag Name Data Type Definition
0 when a module is present and reporting valid data, OxFFF_FFFF when no
Fault DINT, Binary Module fault bit: module is present, no Logix connection exits, or reported data is invalid.
Readback SINT Output channel readback state, 1 bit per channel for channels 0…7:
0 = Off/de-energized
1 = On/energized
Status DINT, bit-field Redundancy and power status:
Bit Name Description
8 GroupFault 0 = Good
1 = Any channel or module faulted/failed
PtFault SINT Channel fault status; 1 bit per channel for channels 0 …7:
0 = Normal
1 = Pint is faulted/failed
NoLoad SINT No Load diagnostic status, 1 bit per channel for channels 0…7:
0 = Normal
1 = Indicates no load detected
ShortCircuit SINT Short Circuit diagnostic status, 1 bit per channel for 0…7 channels:
0 = Normal
1 = Indicates short circuit detected
Reports the total current that all active digital output modules in a group are drawing from the field power
GroupFieldPowerCurrent DINT supply. Accuracy is ± 10%.
Reports the voltage from the field power supply for the specified module and field power input.
FieldPowerVoltage1 DINT Accuracy is ± 500 mV

230 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Appendix D I/O Tag Definitions

Table 53 - 8-channel Digital Output, Simplex, Input (Continued)

Tag Name Data Type Definition
Reports the voltage from the field power supply for the specified module and field power input.
FieldPowerVoltage2 DINT Accuracy is ± 500 mV
Current: REAL
Current / Voltage Each element of the array Reports the current for the channel in
Ch AB_1715_ChStatusStruc:I:0[8] Status Array comprises milliamps and with an accuracy of ± 2 mA and
± 10% of measurement
Voltage: REAL
Reports the channel voltage at the output
terminals in units of millivolts and with an
accuracy of ± 500 mV (The voltage element
cannot report values below 0 mV

Table 54 - 8-channel Digital Output, Duplex, Input

Tag Name Data Type Definition
0 when one module is present and reporting valid data, OxFFF_FFFF when no
Fault DINT, Binary Module fault bit: modules are present, no Logix connection exists, or reported data is invalid.
Readback SINT Output channel readback state, 1 bit per channel for channels 0…7:
0 = Off/de-energized
1 = On/energized
Status DINT, bit-field Redundancy and power status:
Bit Name Description
0 ModAFault 0 = Good
1 = Fault or module not present
1 ModBFault 0 = Good
1 = Fault or module not present
8 GroupFault 0 = Good
1 = Any channel or module faulted/failed
9 ModAGroupFault 0 = Good
1 = Any channel or module A faulted/failed
10 ModBGroupFault 0 = Good
1 = Any channel or Module B faulted/failed
PtFault SINT Channel fault status; 1 bit per channel for channels 0 …7:
0 = Normal
1 = Pint is faulted/failed
NoLoad SINT No Load diagnostic status, 1 bit per channel for channels 0…7:
0 = Normal
1 = Indicates no load detected
ShortCircuit SINT Short Circuit diagnostic status, 1 bit per channel for 0…7 channels:
0 = Normal
1 = Indicates short circuit detected
Reports the total current that all active digital output modules in a group are drawing from the field power
GroupFieldPowerCurrent DINT supply. Accuracy is ± 10%.
Reports the voltage from the field power supply for the specified module and field power input.
ModAFieldPowerVoltage1 DINT Accuracy is ± 500 mV
Reports the voltage from the field power supply for the specified module and field power input.
ModAFieldPowerVoltage2 DINT Accuracy is ± 500 mV
Reports the voltage from the field power supply for the specified module and field power input.
ModBFieldPowerVoltage1 DINT Accuracy is ± 500 mV

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 231

Appendix D I/O Tag Definitions

Table 54 - 8-channel Digital Output, Duplex, Input (Continued)

Tag Name Data Type Definition
Reports the voltage from the field power supply for the specified module and field power input.
ModBFieldPowerVoltage2 DINT Accuracy is ± 500 mV
Current: REAL
Reports the current for the channel in
Ch AB_1715_ChStatusStruc:I:0[8] milliamps and with an accuracy of ± 2 mA
and ± 10% of measurement
Current / Voltage Each element of the array
Status Array comprises Voltage: REAL
Reports the channel voltage at the output
terminals in units of millivolts and with an
accuracy of ± 500 mV (The voltage element
cannot report values below 0 mV

1715-IF16 This section describes the tags that are associated with the 1715-IF16 module.
Table 55 - 16-channel Analog Input, Simplex, Input
Tag Name Data Type Definition
0 when one module is present and reporting valid data, OxFFF_FFFF when no
Fault DINT, Binary Module fault bit: modules are present, no Logix connection exists, or reported data is invalid.
ChSimplex[0...15] Array of structure Array of 16 structures that represent the data and fault status for channels 0…15:
Data REAL Input data status
Faults DINT, bit-field Channel fault status:
Bit Name Description
0 Fault 0 = Good
1 = Circuit fault for this channel
3 Underrange 0 = Good
1 = Underrange detected
4 Overrange 0 = Good
1 = Overrange detected
RollingTimestamp INT Time stamp data
Status DINT, bit-field Bit Name Description
8 GroupFault 0 = Good
1 = Any channel on the module is faulted/
failed

Table 56 - 16-channel Analog Input, Duplex, Input

Tag Name Data Type Definition
0 when one module is present and reporting valid data, OxFFF_FFFF when
Fault DINT, Binary Module fault bit: no modules are present, no Logix connection exits, or reported data is
invalid.
ChSimplex[0…15] Array of structure Array of 16 structures that represent the data and fault status for channels 0…15:
0 = Data
1 = Faults
Data REAL Input data
Faults DINT, bit-field Channel fault status:
Bit Name Description
0 Fault 0 = Good
1 = Circuit fault for this channel
1 ModAFault 0 = Good
1 = This channel on Module A is faulted/
failed
2 ModBFault 0 = Good
1 = This channel on Module B is faulted/
failed
3 Underrange 0 = Good

232 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Appendix D I/O Tag Definitions

Table 56 - 16-channel Analog Input, Duplex, Input

Tag Name Data Type Definition
1 = Underrange detected
4 Overrange 0 = Good
1 = Overrange detected
RollingTimestamp INT Time stamp data
Status DINT, bit-field Bit Name Description
0 ModAFault 0 = Good
1 = Fault or module not present
1 ModBFault 0 = Good
1 = Fault or module not present
8 GroupFault 0 = Good
1 = Any channel on module is faulted/
failed
9 ModAGroupFault 0 = Good
1 = Any channel on Module A is faulted/
failed
10 ModBGroupFault 0 = Good
1 = Any channel on ModuleB is faulted/
failed

1715-OF8I This section describes the tags that are associated with the 1715-OF8I module.
Table 57 - 8-channel Analog Output, Output
Tag Name Data Type Definition
AOCh[0…7] Array of structure Array of 8 structures for the output data:
0 = Data
1 = Faults
Data REAL Commanded output value
Control DINT, bit-field Alarm control:
Bit Name Description
Rising edge transition (that is, 0 > 1)
0 HAlarmUnlatch unlatches alarm
Rising edge transition (that is, 0 > 1)
1 LAlarmUnlatch unlatches alarm
Rising edge transition (that is, 0 > 1)
2 RateAlarmUnlatch unlatches alarm

Table 58 - 8-channel Analog Output, Simplex, Input

Tag Name Data Type Definition
0 when a module is present and reporting valid data, OxFFF_FFFF when no
Fault DINT, Binary Module fault bit: module is present, no Logix connection exits, or reported data is invalid.
ChDuplex[0…7] Array of structure Array of 8 structures that represent the data and fault status for channels 0…7:
0 = Data
1 = Faults
Readback REAL Input data
Faults DINT, bit-field Channel fault status:
Bit Name Description
0 Fault 0 = Good
1 = Circuit fault for this channel
4 InHold
5 NotANumber
6 LAlarm

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 233

Appendix D I/O Tag Definitions

Table 58 - 8-channel Analog Output, Simplex, Input (Continued)

Tag Name Data Type Definition
7 HAlarm
8 RateAlarm
9 LineFault
Status DINT, bit-field Bit Name Description
8 GroupFault 0 = Good
1 = Any channel on module is faulted/
failed

Table 59 - 8-channel Analog Output, Duplex, Input

Tag Name Data Type Definition
0 when a module is present and reporting valid data, OxFFF_FFFF when no
Fault DINT, Binary Module fault bit: module is present, no Logix connection exits, or reported data is invalid.
ChDuplex[0…7] Array of structure Array of 8 structures that represent the data and fault status for channels 0…7:
0 = Data
1 = Faults
Readback REAL Input data
Faults DINT, bit-field Channel fault status:
Bit Name Description
0 Fault 0 = Good
1 = Circuit fault for this channel
1 ModAFault 0 = Good
1 = Fault or Module A not present
2 ModBFault 0 = Good
1 = Fault or Module B not present
4 InHold
5 NotANumber
6 LAlarm
7 HAlarm
8 RateAlarm
9 LineFault
Redundancy and power status:
Bit Name Description
0 ModAFault 0 = Good
1 = Fault or module not present
1 ModBFault 0 = Good
1 = Fault or module not present
8 GroupFault 0 = Good
Status DINT, bit-field
1 = Any channel on module is faulted/
failed
9 ModAGroupFault 0 = Good
1 = Any channel on Module A is faulted/
failed
10 ModuleBGroupFault 0 = Good
1 = Any channel on Module B is faulted/
failed

234 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Appendix E

History of Changes

This appendix contains the new or updated information for each revision of
this publication. These lists include substantive updates only and are not
intended to reflect all changes. Translated versions are not always available for
each revision.

Table 60 - 1715-UM001L-EN-P, September 2022

Change
Moved content related to SIL 2 safety applications to the ControlLogix in SIL 2 Applications Safety Reference
Manual, publication 1756-RM001

Table 61 - 1715-UM001K-EN-P, March 2022

Change
Updated for UKCA
Updated Appendix D - PFD and PFH Calculations for a SIL 2 System

Table 62 - 1715-UM001J-EN-P, December 2020

Change
Updated 1715-AENTR firmware revision in PFD Calculations with 24-hour MTTR to 3.003
Applied latest publication template

Table 63 - 1715-UM001I-EN-P, March 2020

Change
Updated IEC 61508 edition.
Updated calculations for 1715 I/O modules.
Changed the section PFD Calculations with 10-hour MTTR to PFD Calculations with 24-hour MTTR.
Added Communications Data section.

Table 64 - 1715-UM001H-EN-P, December 2018

Change
Changed ambient temperature range.
Added references to ATEX and IECEx UL certificates in the Literature Library.

Table 65 - 1715-UM001G-EN-P, October 2018

Change
Format changes.
Added Important table to 1715-C2 Expansion Cable section.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 235

Appendix E History of Changes

Table 66 - 1715-UM001F-EN-P, July 2017

Change
Increment ControlFLASH™ tool version..
Correction to Typographical errors.
Cross-reference and hypertext links.
Change heading to accommodate table of contents.
Reformat Cell height and margins in table.
Reformat instruction numbers.
Version update to RSLogix 5000® programming software.
Remove reference to installation from disk and reword section.
Insertion of screen capture for updated version of software.
Modification of status indicator behavior.
Move December 2016 New and Updated Information into Revision History.

Table 67 - 1715-UM001E-EN-P, December 2016

Change
Addition of Studio 5000 environment to required software.
Studio 5000™ Logix Designer application is the rebranding of RSLogix 5000 software
Added sentence “One module in a duplex pair can be removed and replaced without system interruption.” to the
Redundancy System Overview section.
Added detail of the flashing green Network status indicator to identify ‘partner’ adapter during module
replacement to a 1715 Redundant I/O operational system. Detail included in an Important statement.
Inclusion of Figure 4- “Shield Termination Arrangement to Help Prevent Ground loops” and supporting text
Added “Timestamping” section
Added “Attention” statement to detailing how warranty effected by failure to install retaining clips correctly.
Added drawing detail for removal of adapter coding peg (Reducing number of coding pegs from 3 to 2.
Added “Attention” statement to “Power Requirements” subsection
Added ControlFLASH detail to the new “System Software” section.
Added “Attention” statement to “Install the Power Supply” section
Added sub-sub-section detailing the addition of a 120 Ω resistor assembly to facilitate use of HART Secondary
Master.
Added Chapter 3, Security
Added more detailed explanation to examples of how to upgrade / replace digital I/O modules
Added sub section Field Power Status Integers
Added subsection Field Fault Detection
Added New Section “HART”
Modified Firmware Revision Column in Table 39- 1715 Devices in a SIL 2 System
Modified Table 40 - SIL 2 Add-On Instructions
Modified Table 46 - Maximum Scan Rates Measured. Added detail - The L75 Controller was used for taking
measurements.
Added Table 47 - Maximum Scan Rates Measured - The L75 Controller was used for taking measurements
Added detail to subsection Module Faults
Added detail to subsection Channel Faults

Table 68 - 1715-UM001D-EN-P, September 2015

Change
Updated European Hazardous Location Approval information and embedded
certificates
Added slew tolerance information
Added Electronic Keying approved text
Clarification of SIL 2 module reconfiguration

236 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Appendix E History of Changes

Table 69 - 1715-UM001C-EN-P, March 2014

Change
Updates to include SIL 2 operations with L7 ControlLogix® controllers
Studio 5000 Logix Designer® application added throughout document and new information about who can use this
system
Using ControlLogix in SIL 2 Applications Safety Reference Manual added to Additional Resources section
Added redundant 1715 adapter and status indicator information
Added information to use a 1715 system in a SIL 2 application
Corrected drawing; added 1756-L7 controller and 1756-RM2 module; added reference for DLR topologies
Corrected drawing; added 1756-L7 controller and 1756-RM2 module
Network status indicator information
CIP™ messages
Required connections for duplex and simplex operation
Listen Only connections
Conformal coating is available on all 1715 modules
1715-A2A adapter base unit fuse graphic and removal and replacement information
Digital input termination assembly removal and replacement of fuses
Digital output termination assembly removal and replacement of fuses
Analog input termination assembly removal and replacement of fuses
Power requirements
1715 chassis firmware update; power recycle needed
ControlFLASH revision number
Power requirements for PELV/SELV
Correction to system power graphic
Digital Input diagram correction-standard inputs
Short circuit information
Digital Input diagram correction-line monitored inputs. Added reference for calibration drift checks
Corrected digital input termination assembly graphics
Added Attention table for inductive loads
Added missing arrow on 1715-OB8DE function block diagram, to go from the Control B box to the Output Control
Diagram correction-digital outputs
Damage to pins when inserting/removing I/O modules under power can fault the system
Corrected analog inputs graphic by removing footnote numbers on voltage
Added information about analog field loops, input modules and analog input field devices
Find and record MAC addresses
Added status indicator labels to the adapter graphic of the locking mechanism
Changes throughout the Assign an IP Address on the BOOTP/DHCP Server section
Verify BOOTP network settings Important table added
Added last step to disable BootP/DHCP
Module inhibiting when using multiple controllers
Corrected ohms symbol and added DC on voltage numbers
Shutdown states
Removed references to the 1756-IA16 module
Digital input module tags
Digital output module tags
Correction of table header to ControlLogix Analog I/O Modules and Components
Added performance criteria for the analog input module
Added performance criteria for the analog output module
Module inhibiting when using multiple controllers
Changed Get Support Now website to the Product and Compatibility Download Center website, added AOP versions
for the adapter and I/O modules. Added reference to the release list of approved versions on https://
www.tuvasi.com/
Updated screen capture throughout to reflect Logix Designer application version 21 interface and to include SIL 2
operation options

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 237

Appendix E History of Changes

Table 69 - 1715-UM001C-EN-P, March 2014

Change
Connections for Listen Only
Module definition parameters for 1715-IB16D digital input module in Duplex mode for SIL 2 applications
Added Important table on how to change Alarms/Limits values
Added a chapter about SIL 2 safety operation with 1715 redundant I/O
Added a chapter about SIL 2 Add-On Instructions with 1715 redundant I/O
Corrected text from 3.9 to 4.3
Corrected text from 15 to 15.4. Added Calibration Drift Checks section
SIL 2 safety application online configuration restrictions
Added appendix for PFD and PFH calculations for a SIL 2 system
Added appendix for SIL 2 Applications Checklist
Added appendix for Tag Definitions

238 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Appendix E History of Changes

Notes:

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 239

Appendix E History of Changes

240 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Index

Numerics add
1715-AENTR 162
1715-A2A 1756-EN2TR 161
adapter base 37, 58 analog input module 185
expansion cable 69 analog output module 190
1715-A3IO digital input module 174
expansion cable 67 digital output module 181
I/O base 40, 59 Add-on Profile
1715-AENTR 1715-AENTR 155
adapter 13, 36 I/O module 155
add 162 alarms
Add-on Profile 155 disable 192
diagnostic features 197 latch limit 192
install 100 latch rate 192
IP address 163 analog I/O module 133
1715-C2 calibration drift checks 221
expansion cable 46 cyclic trigger 26
1715-IB16D 116 features 135
diagnostic features 197 operating modes 138, 139, 144
digital input module 108 shutdown states 139
features 116 analog input module
1715-IF16 133 1715-IF16 108
analog input module 108 add 185
diagnostic features 198 field loop circuits 86
features 134 field wire 88
termination assembly 134 performance criteria 134
1715-OB8DE recommended circuits 85
diagnostic features 197 simplex mode 188
digital output module 108 status indicators 207
1715-OF8I 133 termination assembly 44
analog output module 108, 135 analog output module
diagnostic features 198 1715-OF8I 108, 135
features 135 add 190
1715-TADIF16 133 duplex mode 190
1715-TADOF8 133 field wire 93
performance criteria 135
1715-TASIF16 133 simplex mode 194
1715-TASOF8 133 status indicators 208
1756-EN2TR termination assembly 45
add 161 architecture
duplex 20
mixed 22
A simplex 19
adapter 202 assembly tools
1715-AENTR 13, 36 system 34
configure 162 assign
cyclic trigger 26 IP address 103
Ethernet 95
install 100
IP address swap 165 B
RPI 27 base unit 13
SIL 2 165 before you begin 33
status indicators 202
topology 95 BOOTP 103, 104
wire 70 button
adapter base 51 change 165
1715-A2A 37, 58
install 58
C
cable
assembly 64
Cat5e 95
shielded twisted pair 95

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 241

Index

calibration 221 digital input module 116

calibration drift checks 1715-IB16D 108
analog I/O module 221 add 174
Cat5e duplex mode 174
cable 95 recommended circuits 73
change SIL 2 176
simplex mode 179
button 165 status indicators 204
change-of-state tags 130, 131
digital module 122 termination assembly 41, 117
change-of-state trigger termination assembly wire 75
digital module 26 digital module 115
channel 193 change-of-state 122
fault 200 change-of-state trigger 26
chassis size 165 features 117
CIP RIUP 118
EtherNet/IP network 26, 197 RPI 121
SIL 2 12 termination assembly 115
coding pegs 97 type 115
digital output module 116
module 96
compatibility 1715-OB8DE 108
add 181
digital output module 118 compatibility 118
configuration duplex mode 181
redundant I/O system 155 features 116
tab 182, 187 field loop circuits 83
configure field wire 80
adapter 162 motor starters 118
controller 160 recommended circuits 78
connection 166 simplex mode 184
data 165 status indicators 205
listen only 165 termination assembly 42, 118
power 70 disable
connection wire alarms 192
ground 71 DLR
connections 26 topology 25
controller 11 dowel pin 102
configure 160 duplex
create new project architecture 20
RSLogix 5000 programming software 158 duplex mode
cyclic trigger analog output module 190
adapter 26 digital input module 174
analog I/O module 26 digital output module 181

D E
data electronic keying 165
connection 165 enclosure 48
echo output 125 energize-on-communication-failure 129
format connection 27 Ethernet 163
transfer 120 adapter 95
de-energize-to-trip 129 topology 25
DHCP/BOOTP EtherNet/IP network
IP address 24 CIP 26, 197
diagnostic expansion cable 63, 65
latching 127 1715-A2A 69
diagnostic features 197 1715-A3IO 67
1715-AENTR 197 1715-C2 46
1715-IB16D 197 ferrites 64
1715-IF16 198 install 66
1715-OB8DE 197
1715-OF8I 198

242 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Index

F indicators 118
inhibit
fault
module 119
bit 126 input module
field 200
mode 193 compatibility 117
value 193 install
fault reporting 131 1715-AENTR 100
standard input modules 130 adapter 100
fault/program action adapter base 58
tab 183, 193 expansion cable 66
I/O base 59
features I/O expansion cable 63
1715-IB16D 116 I/O module 108
1715-IF16 134 power supply 57
1715-OF8I 135 slot cover 110
digital module 117 termination assembly 61
ferrites instrument ground 71
expansion cable 64 Internet protocol tab 168
field IP address
fault 200 assign 103
wire connection 72
DHCP/BOOTB 24
field loop circuits
obtaining 24
analog input module 86 primary 23
digital inputs 77 IP address swap 24
digital output module 83
adapter 165
field wire
analog input module 88
analog output module 93 K
digital output module 80
format connection keying
datat 27 module 96
fuse
termination assembly 42, 43, 44, 201 L
fusing 126
nondiagnostic latch limit
output modules 126 alarms 192
latch rate
alarms 192
G latching
general tab 180, 184, 188 diagnostic 127
ground layout
connection wire 71 hardware 16
wire 71 system 15
limits configuration tab 192
listen only
H connection 165
hardware locking screw 103
layout 16
heating and cooling requirements 47
high clamp limit 192
M
MAC address 104
mixed
I architecture 22
I/O base 51 mode
1715-A3IO 40, 59 fault 193
install 59
I/O configuration folder 195
I/O expansion cable
install 63
I/O module 14, 36
Add-on Profile 155
install 108
partner 14
RPI 27
termination assembly 41

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 243

Index

module recommended circuits

coding pegs 96 analog input module 85
data format 137 digital input module 73
defintion dialog box 175 digital output module 78
fault reporting digital module 119 redundant I/O system
info A tab 167 configuration 155
info B tab 168 removal and insertion under power (RIUP) 135
inhibit RSLogix 5000 programming software remove module 111
136
keying 96 reset button 203
operating modes 137 retaining clips
placement 50 termination assembly 63
polarization 96 RIUP
positioning 14 analog module 135
properties 161, 194 digital module 118
resolution 137 RPI
scaling 137 adapter 27
module A digital module 121
module B 25 I/O module 27
module B setting 121
module A 25 RSLinx Classic software 106
module configuration 107 RSLogix 5000 programming software 96
multicast 130 create new project 158
project 158
RSWho 106
N
network tab 171
S
safety application
O SIL 2 9, 176, 187, 235
operating modes scaling 137
analog I/O module 138, 139, 144 shielded twisted pair
output cable 95
data echo 125 shutdown states
output fault state 125 analog I/O module 139
overview SIL 2
system 11 adapter 165
CIP 12
digital input module 176
P safety application 9, 176, 187, 235
simplex
partner
architecture 19
I/O module 14 simplex mode
parts list 33
analog input module 188
performance criteria analog output module 194
analog input module 134 digital input module 179
analog output module 135 digital output module 184
polarization slot cover 46
module 96 install 110
port configuration 170 slot positions 51
power software installation 155
connection 70 solenoids 118
requirements 47 star
system 70
power supply 115, 133 topology 17
static configuration 108
install 57
primary status indicators 120, 136, 199
IP address 23 adapter 202
analog input module 207
analog output module 208
R digital input module 204
digital output module 205
ramp 192 status reporting 131
rate 193 standard input modules 130
to program 193 switchover considerations 23

244 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Index

system
architecture 13
assembly tools 34
configuration 14
connection 26
example 14
hardware 35
layout 15
overview 11
parts 33
performance 26
power 70
software 48

T
tags
digital input module 130, 131
termination assembly 13
1715-IF16 134
analog input module 44
analog output module 45
digital input module 41, 117
digital module 115
digital output module 42, 118
fuse 42, 43, 44, 201
I/O module 41
install 61
retaining clips 63
termination assembly wire
digital input module 75
topology
adapter 95
DLR 25
Ethernet 25
star 17
troubleshooting
module status indicators 120
type
digital module 115

U
unicast 121
unlatch 192

V
value
fault 193

W
watchdog facility 116
wire
adapter 70
ground 71

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 245

Index

246 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

 Redundant I/O System User Manual

Notes:

Rockwell Automation Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022 247

Rockwell Automation Support
Use these resources to access support information.
Find help with how-to videos, FAQs, chat, user forums, Knowledgebase, and product
Technical Support Center rok.auto/support
notification updates.
Local Technical Support Phone Numbers Locate the telephone number for your country. rok.auto/phonesupport
Quickly access and download technical specifications, installation instructions, and user
Technical Documentation Center rok.auto/techdocs
manuals.
Literature Library Find installation instructions, manuals, brochures, and technical data publications. rok.auto/literature
Product Compatibility and Download Center Download firmware, associated files (such as AOP, EDS, and DTM), and access product rok.auto/pcdc
(PCDC) release notes.

Documentation Feedback
Your comments help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve our content, complete the
form at rok.auto/docfeedback.

Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)

At the end of life, this equipment should be collected separately from any unsorted municipal waste.

Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental compliance information on its website at rok.auto/pec.

Allen-Bradley, ControlFLASH, ControlLogix, expanding human possibility, FactoryTalk, GuardLogix, Rockwell Automation, RSLinx, RSLogix, RSLogix 5000, Stratix, Studio 5000, and
Studio 5000 Logix Designer are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
CIP and EtherNet/IP are trademarks of ODVA, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş. Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752, İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400 EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur

Publication 1715-UM001L-EN-P - December 2022

Supersedes Publication 1715-UM001K-EN-P - May 2022 Copyright © 2022 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.